GC28 6514 9_OS_Assembler_Rel21_Jan74 9 OS Assembler Rel21 Jan74

GC28-6514-9_OS_Assembler_Rel21_Jan74 GC28-6514-9_OS_Assembler_Rel21_Jan74

User Manual: GC28-6514-9_OS_Assembler_Rel21_Jan74

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 173

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

File No. 8360-21
Order No. GC28-6514-9

Systems Reference Library

OS Assembler Language
OS Release 21

This publication contains specifications
for the ~BM System/360 Operating System
Assembler Language (Leyels E and F) .
The assembler language is a symbolic
programming language used to write programs
for the IBM System/360. The language provides a convenient means for representing
the machine instructions and related data
necessary to program the IBM System/360.
The IBM Systelt1/360 Operating System Assembler Program processes the language and
provides auxiliary functions useful in the
preparation and documentation of a program,
and includes facilities for processing the
assembler macro language.
Part I of this publication describes the
assembler language.
Part II of this publication describes an
extension of the assembler language -- the
macro language
used to define macro
instructions.

PREFACE

This publication is a reference manual
for the programmer using the assembler
language and its features.
Part I of this publication presents
information common to all parts of the
language followed by specific information
concerning the symbolic machine instruction
codes and the assembler program functions
provided for t:he programmer I s use.
Part II
contains a description of the macro language and procedures for its use.
Appendixes A through J follow Part II.
Appendixes A through F are associated with
Parts I and II and present such items as a
summary chart for constants, instruction
listings, character set representations,
and other aids to programming. Appendix G
contains macro language summary charts, and
Appendix H is a sample program. Appendix I
is
a
features
comparison
chart
of
System/360 assemblers. Appendix J includes
samples of macro definitions.
Knowledge
of IBH System/360 machine
operations, particularly storage addressing,
data formats, and machine instruction
formats and functions, is prerequisite to
using this publication,
as is experience
with programming concepts and techniques or
completion of basic courses of instruction
in these areas.
IBM System/360 machine

operations are discussed in the publication
IBM System/360 Principles of Operation,
Order No. GA22-682l. The IBM System/370
machine operations are discussed in the
publication IBM System/370 Principles of
Operation, Order No. GA22-7000. Information
on program assembling, linkage editing,
executing, interpreting listings, and
assembler programming considerations is
provided in OS Assembler (F} Programmer's
Guide, Order No. GC26-3756.

The following publications are referred to
in this publication:
OS Introduction, Order No. GC28-6534
OS Utilities, Order No. GC28-6586
OS Loader and Linkage
Order No. GC28-6538

Edito~,

OS Supervisor Services and Macro
Instructions, Order No. GC28-6646
OS Data Management Macro Instructions,
Order No. GC26-3794
OS Data Management Services Guide,
Order No. GC26-3746

lenth Edition (January, 1974)
This is a reprint of GC28-6514-8 incorporating changes released in the following Technical
Newsletter:
GN33-8154 (dated April 30, 1973)
This Technical Newsletter is a part of release 21.7 of OS/MPT and OS/MVT.
This edition applies to release 21 of IBM System/360 Operating System and to all subsequent
releases until otherwise indicated in new editions or Technical Newsletters. Changes are continually
made to specifications herein; before using this publication in connection with the operation of
IBM systems, consult tJile IBM System/360 and System/370 Bibliography, Order No. GA22-6822,
for the editions that are applicable and current.
Requests for copies of IBM publications should be made to your IBM representative or to the IBM
branch office serving your locality.
A form is provided at the back of this publication for readers' comments. If the form has been
removed, comments may be addressed to IBM Nordic Laboratory, Product Communications,
Box 962, S-181 09 Lidingo 9, Sweden. Comments become the property of IBM.

©Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1966, 1968, 1969, 1970, 1972, 1974

CONTENTS

PART 1 -- THE ASSEMBLER LANGUAGE
SECTION 1:
INTRODUCTION.
Compatibility • •

3
3

The Assembler Language • •
Machine Operation Codes.
Assembler Operation Codes • •
Macro Instructions •

3
3
3
3

The Assembler Program.
Basic Functions.

4
4

Programmer Aids.

4

Operating System Relationships •

5

SECTION 2:

7

GENERAL INFORMATION • •

AsseJ';:.)ler Language Coding Conventions. • 7
Coding Form. • • • •
7
Continuation Lines •
7
Statement Boundaries
8
Statement Format • •
• • •
8
Identification-Sequence Field.
9
Summary of Statement Format.
9
Character Set • • • • • • • • • • • 10
Assembler Language Structure •

• • 10

Terms and Expressions.
Terms . . • • • • •
Symbols. • • • •
Self-Defining Terms.
Location Counter Reference •
Literals • • • • • • • •
Symbol Length Attribute
Reference • • • • • • •
Terms in Parentheses.
Expressions • • • • • • • • •
Evaluation of Expressions. •
Absolute and Relocatable
Expressions • • • • • • • •

•
• •
•
•
•
•

• 15
• 16
• • 16
• 16
• 17

SECTION 3: ADDRESSING -- PROGRAM
SECTIONING AND LINKING. •

.19

Addressing • • • • . • • •
Addresses -- Explicit and Implied.
Base Register Instructions • • •
USING -- Use Base Address
Register. • • • • • • • • •
DROP -- Drop Base Register •
Programming with the USING
Instruction. • • •
Relative Addressing • • • •
•
Program Sectioning and Linking •
Control Sections • • • • • •
Control Section Location
Assignment • • • • • • •
First Control section • • •
START -- Start Assembly. •

10
10
10
12
14
14

• 19
• 19
• 19
• 19
• 20

• 21
• 21

• • 22
• 22
• 22

• 23
• • 23

iii

CSECT -- Identify Control
Section • • • • • • • • •
•
Unnamed Control Section. •
•
DSECT -- Identify Dummy Section. •
External Dummy Sections(Assemb1er F}.
DXD -- Define External Dummy
Section. • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
CXD - Cumulative Length External
Dummy Section. • • • • • • • • • • •
COM -- Define Blank Common Control
Section. • • • • • • • • • • •
Symbolic Linkages • • • • • • •
ENTRY -- Identify Entry-Point
Symbol • • • • • • • • • • • •
•
EXTRN -- Identify External Symbol • •
Addressing External Control
sections. • • • • • • • •
SECTION 4:

MACHINE-INSTRUCTIONS • •

23
24
24
25
25
25
26
26

27
27

28
29

Machine-Instruction Statements • •
Instruction Alignment and
Checking. • • • • • • • • •
Operand Fields and Subfields • •
Lengths -- Explicit and Implied

• 29
• 29
• 30

Machine-Instruction Mnemonic Codes •
Machine-Instruction Examples.
RR Format.
RX Format.
RS Format. • • • • • •
SI Format.
SS Format • • •

31
• 31
31
32
32
• 32
32

• 29

Extended Mnemonic Codes.

32

SECTION 5: ASSEMBLER INSTRUCTION
STATEMENTS. • • • • • • • • •

35

Symbol Definition Instruction. • •
EQU -- EQUATE SYMBOL. • • • •
Operation Code Definition Instruction.
OPSYN -- EQUATE OPERATION CODE . .
Data Definition Instructions • • • • •
DC -- DEFINE CONSTANT • • • • • • •
Operand Subfield 1: DUplication
Factor. • • • • • • •
Operand Subfield 2: Type. • •
Operand Subfield 3: Modifiers.
Operand Subfield 4: Constant •
DS -- Define Storage. • • • • • • •
Special Uses of the Duplication
Factor. • • • • • • • • •
CCW -- Define Channel Command Word.
0

•

• •

Listing Control Instructions . •
TITLE
Identify Assembly Output
EJECT
Start New Page
SPACE
Space Listing.
PRINT
Print Optional Data.

• 35
• 35
36

. 36
• 36
• 36
38
38
38
41

• 48
• 50
• 50
51
51
52
52
• 52

Program Control Instructions . . .
.53
ICTL -- Input Format Control . . . . . 53
ISEQ -- Input Sequence Checking . . . 54
PUNCH -- Punch a Card . . . . .
.54
REPRO -- Reproduce Following Card . . 55
ORG -- Set Location Counter . . . . . 55
LTORG -- Begin Literal Pool . . . . . 55
Special Addressing Consideration .56
Duplicate Literals . . . . . . . . 56
CNOP -- Conditional No Operation . . . 56
COpy -- Copy Predefined Source
Coding . . . . . . . . . .
• .57
. . . 58
END
End Assembly . . .

Inner Macro Instructions .

.

73

Levels of Macro Instructions

74

SECTION 9:
HOW TO WRITE CONDI'l'IONAL
ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS .

75

SET Symbols . . . . . .
Defining SET Symbols .
Using Variable Symbols .

•
•

• •

• 75
• 75
• • 75

PART 2 -- THE MACRO LANGUAGE
SECTION 6:
INTRODUCTION TO THE MACRO
LANGUAGE.

.61

The Macro Instruction Statement.

.61

Attributes . . . . . . . . . .
Type Attribute (T').
... . .
Length (L'), Scaling (S'), and
Integer (I') Attributes.
.
Count Attribute (K')
•
Number Attribute (N I ) . • •
Assigning Attributes to Symbols . .

The Macro Definition

.61

Sequence Symbols .

.61

LCLA,LCLB,LCLC -- Define SET Symbols .

The Macro Library . .

·

System & Programmer Macro Definitions . . 62
System Macro Instructions.

.

.

.62

Varying the Generated Statements

.

.

.

Variable Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Types of Variable Symbols..
.62
Assigning Values to Variable
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Global SET Symbols . .
....63

SETC -- Set Character . . .
Type Attribute . .
Character Expression .
Substring Notation .
Using SETC Symbols .

Organization of this Part of the
Publication
. . . ..
.

SETB -- Set Binary . . . . .
Evaluation of Logical
Expressions . . . .
Using SETB Symbols . .

SECTION 7:
HOW TO PREPARE MACRO
DEFINITIONS .
....

. . . 63
.

MACRO -- Macro Definition Header .

78
78
79
79

· 80

SETA -- Set Arithmetic .
Evaluation of Arithmetic
Expressions . . .
Using SETA Symbols .

.62

..

.

76
77

. 81

81
82
· 82
• 83
83
• • 83

.

84

· 85
· 86
•

• 87
87

.65
AIF

Conditiona+ Branch.

AGO

Unconditional Branch.

88

.65
•

•

•

• 89

•

• 89

.

. 90

MEND -- Macro Definition Trailer . . . . 65
Macro Instruction Prototype . .
Statement Format . . . .

·

.65
. 66

·

.66

Symbolic Parameters. .
Concatenating Symbolic
Parameters with Other
Characters or Other Symbolic
Parameters . .
Comments Statements.

.

.67

COpy Statements . . .

·

.

.

ACTR -- Conditional Assembly Loop
Counter . . . . . . . . . . .
ANOP -- Assembly No Operation.

Model Statements .

.

.

.

.

Conditional Assembly Elements.

.68
• .69

.71

Macro Instruction Operands .

·

.71

Statement Format .

• • • 72

Omitted Operands .

• .72
·

. 93

MEXIT

Macro Definition Exit

93

MNOTE

Request for Error Message

93

.69

·

.

• • • 90

SECTION 10: EXTENDED FEATURES OF THE
MACRO LANGUAGE. . . . . . . .

SECTION 8:
HOW TO WRITE MACRO
INSTRUCTIONS . . .

Operand Sublists .

.

Global and Local Variable Symbols.
Defining Local and Global SET
Symbols . .
Using Global and Local SET
Symbols . . . . . . . .
Subscripted SET Symbols . .

• 94
•

• 95
95

• • 97

SYSTEM VARIABLE SYMBOLS. . . .
. . . 98
&SYSNDX -- Macro Instruction
Index . . . . . . . . . . .
. 98

.72

iv

APPENDIX C:

&SYSECT -- Current Control
Section . . . . . . . . .
. 99
&SYSLIST -- Macro Instruction
Operand. . . . .
. . . . . 100
Keyword Macro Definitions And
Instructions . . . . . . . .
Keyword Prototype . . .
Keyword Macro Instruction.

MACHINE-INSTRUCTION FORMAT.119

APPENDIX D: MACHINE-INSTRUCTION
MNEMONIC OPERATION CODES . . . .

. . 100
.101
. . . 101

Mixed-Mode Macro Definitions and
Instructions . . • . • . . • . . . . . 103
Mixed-Mode Prototype . . . . . . 103
Mixed-Mode Macro Instruction • . 103

. . 121

APPENDIX E:

ASSEMBLER INSTRUCTIONS.

.131

APPENDIX F:

SUMMARY OF CONSTANTS.

.135

APPENDIX G:

MACRO LANGUAGE SUMMARY.

.137

APPENDIX H:

SAMPLE PROGRAM.

APPENDIX I: ASSEMBLER LANGUAGES-FEATURES COMPARISON CHART

.

.141
.145

Macro Definition Compatibility . • . . . 104
APPENDIX J:

APPENDIXES
APPENDIX A:

INDEX . .

CHARACTER CODES • . • . . . 107

APPENDIX B:
HEXADECIMAL-DECIMAL
NUMBER CONVERSION TABLE . . . . • . . . 113

V'

SAMPLE MACRO DEFINITIONS . . 149
.151

ILLUSTRATIONS

figures
Figure 2-1.
F'igure 2-2.
Figure 2-3.
F'igure 3-l.
Figure 4-1.
Figure 5-1.

7
Coding Form
Punched Card Form
8
Assembler Language
Structure--Machine and
Assembler Instructions.
.11
Multiple Base Register
.21
Assignment.
.33
Extended Mnemonic Codes
Type Codes for Constants. .38

Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-3.
Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-6.

Bit-Length Specification
(Single Constant) . . . . .
Bit-Length Specification
(Multiple Constants) . . . .
Bit-Length Specification
(Multiple Operands) . . . .
Floating-Point External
Formats . . . .
....
CNOP Alignment. . . . . . .

39
40
40
45
57

Tables
'rable 4-1.

Address Specification
Details . . . . . . . . . • 30

Table 4-2.

vi

Details of Length Specifications in SS Instructions. 31

SUMMARY OF AMENDMENTS
FOR GC28-6514-8
OS RELEASE 21
USE OF DSECT SYMBOLS IN ADCONS

&SYSLIST

The use of DSECT symbols as absolute
expressions in adcons has been rewritten
for clarification.

An explanation of &SYSLIST(O) has been
added for completeness.
COMMENTS ON ASSEMBLER INSTRUCTIONS
A note has been added explaining why
certain assembler instructions (e.g.,LTORG)
are not flagged when an "operand" is
present.

HEXADECIMAL CONSTANTS AND SYNTAX RULES
Clarification of the syntax restriction
on the number of hexadecimal digits allowable per explicit hexadecimal constant
specification has been added.

POSITIONAL PARAMETERS
A note has been added explaining that
positional parameters cannot be changed
to keywords by substitution.

MACHINE-INSTRUCTION ON MNEMONIC
OPERATION CODES
MACRO SEQUENCE SYMBOLS
Erroneous instruction names, condition
code settings, and operand formats contained
in Appendix D have been corrected.

An explanatory note has been added distinguishing the "name field" of a macro
from the name field parameter.

CHARACTER CODE GRAPHICS

TITLE CHANGES

The EBCDIC printer graphics for the IBM
System/360 8-bit code have been added to
Appendix A.

Cross-references to OS publications
have been changed to reflect their new
titles.

vii

PART I -- THE ASSEMBLER LANGUAGE

SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION
SECTION 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
SECTION 3: ADDRESSING AND PROGRAM SECTIONING AND LINKING
SECTION 4: MACHINE INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 5: ASSEMBLER INSTRUCTIONS

SECTION 1:

computer programs may be expressed in
machine language, i.e., language directly
interpreted by the computer, or in a symbolic language, which is much more mean1ngful to the programmer. The symbolic language, however, must be translated into
machine language before the computer can
execute the program.
This fUnction is
accomplished by a processing program.
Of the various symbolic programming languages, assembler languages are closest to
machine language in form and content.
The
assembler language discussed in this manual
is a symbolic programming language for the
IBM System/360. It enables the programmer
to use all IBM System/360 machine functions, as if he were coding in System/360
machine language.
The assembler program that processes the
language translates symbolic instructions
into machine-language instructions, assigns
storage locations" and perf orms auxiliary
functions necessary to produce an executable machine-language program.

INTRODUCTION

THE ASSEMBLER LANGUAGE
The basis of the assembler language is a
collection of mnemonic symbols which represent:
1.

System/360 machine-language
codes.

operation

2.

Operations (auxiliary functions) to be
performed by the assembler program.

The language is augmented by other symbols, supplied by the programmer, and used
to represent storage addresses or data.
Symbols are easier to remember and code
than their machine-language equivalents.
Use of symbols greatly reduces programming
effort and error.
The programmer may also create a type of
instruction called a macro instruction. A
mnemonic symbol, supplied by the programmer, serves as the operation code of the
instruction.

Machine Operation Codes

Compatibility
System/360 Operating System assemblers
process source programs written in the
Basic Programming Support/360 basic assembler language, the IBM 7090/7094 Support
Package for IBM System/360 assembler language, the Basic Programming Support Assembler (8K Tape) language, the Basic Operating System Assembler (8K Disk) language,
and the Disk and Tape Systems Assembler
language, with the following exceptions:
1.

The XFR assembler instruction is considered an invalid mnemonic operation
code by Operating System/360 assemblers.

2.

The assignment, size, and ordering of
literal pools may differ among the
assemblers.

Differences in the macro language for
System/360 assemblers are described in Section 10 of this publication.

The assembler language provides mnemonic
machine-instruction operation codes for all
machine ins'tructions in the IBM System/360
Universal Instruction Set and extended mnemonic operation codes for the conuitional
branch instruction.

Assembler Operation Codes
The assembler language also contains
mnemonic assembler-instruction
operation
codes, used to specify auxiliary functions
to be performed by the assembler.
These
are instructions to the assembler program
itself and, with a few exceptions, result
in the generation of no machine-language
code by the assembler program.

Macro Instructions
The assembler language enables the programmer
to
define
and
use
macro
instructions.
Section 1:

Introduction

3

Macro instruct~ons are represented by an
operation code which stands for a sequence
of machine and/or assembler instructions.
Macro instructions used in preparing an
assembler language source program fall into
two categories: system macro instructions,
provided by IBM, which relate the object
program to components of the operating
system; and macro instructions created by
the programmer specifically for use in the
program at hand, or for incorporation in a
library, available for future use.
Programmer-created
macro instructions
are used to simplify the writing of a
program and to ensure that a standard
sequence
of
instructions
is used to
accomplish
a
desired
function.
For
instance,
the logic of a program may
require the same instruction sequence to be
executed again and again. Rather than code
this entire sequence each time it is needed, the programmer
creates
a
macro
instruction to represent the sequence and
then, each time the sequence is needed, the
programmer
simply
codes
the
macro
instruction statement.
During assembly,
the sequence of instructions represented by
the macro instruction is inserted in the
object program ..
Part II of this publication discusses
the language and procedures for defining
and using macro instructions.

THE

ASSEMBLER PROGRAM

The assembler program, also referred to
as the "assembler," processes the source
statements
written
in
the
assembler
language.

Basic Functions
Processing involves the translation of
source statements into machine language,
the assignment of storage locations to
instructions and other elements of the
program, and t~he performance of the auxiliary assembler functions deSignated by the
programmer.
The output of the assembler
program is the object program, a machinelanguage translation of the source program.
The assembler furnishes a printed listing
of the source statements and object program
statements
and
additional
information
useful to the programmer in analyzing his
program,
such as error Indications. The
object program is in the format required by
the linkage editor component of Operating
Systerrv360.
(See the linkage editor publica·tion. )
4

The amount of main storage allocated to
the assembler for use during processing
determines the maximum number of certain
language elements that may be present in
the source program.

PROGRAMMER AIDS
The assembler provides auxiliary fUnctions that assist the programmer in checking and documenting programs, in controlling address assignment, in segmenting a
program, in data and symbol definition, in
generating macro instructions, and in controlling the assembler itself. Mnemonic
operation codes for these functions are
provided in the language.
Variety in Data Representation: Decimal,
binary, hexadecimal, or character representation of machine-language binary values
may be employed by the programmer in writing source statements. The prograrr@er selects the representation best suited to his
purpose.
Base Register Address Calculation: As discussed in IBM System/360: Principles of
Operation, the Systern/360 addressing scheme
requires the designation of a base register
(containing a base address value) and a
displacement value in specifying a storage
location. The assembler assumes the clerical burden of calculating storage addresses
in these terms for the symbolic addresses
used by the programmer.
The programmer
retains control of base register usage and
the values entered therein.
Relocatability:
The object programs produced by the assembler are in a format
enabling relocation from the originally
aSSigned storage area to any other suitable
area.
Sectioning and Linkin~ The assembler language and program provide facilities for
partitioning an assembly into one or more
parts called control sections.
Control
sections may be added or deleted when
loading the object program.
Because control sections do not have to be loaded
contiguously in storage, a sect.ioned program may be loaded and executed even though
a continuous block of storage large enough
to accommodate the entire program may not
be available.
The assembler allows symbols to
be
defined in one assembly and referred to in
another, thus effecting a link between

separately assembled programs. This permits reference to data and transfer of
control between programs. A discussion of
sectioning and linking is contained in
Section 3 under the heading, "Program Sectioning and Linking."

Program Listings: A listing of the source
program statements and the resulting object
program statements may be produced by the
assembler for each source program it assembles. The programmer can partly control
the form and content of the listing.

Error Indications: As a source
assembled, it is analyzed for
potential errors in the use of
bIer language. Detected errors
cated in the program listing.

program is
actual or
the assemare indi-

OPERATING SYSTEM RELATIONSHIPS
The assembler is a component of the IBM
System/360 Operating System and, as such,
functions under control of the operating
system. The operating system provides the
assembler with input/output, library, and
other
services needed in assembling a
source program.
In a like manner, the
object program produced by the assembler
will normally operate under control of the
operating system and depend on it for
input/output and other services.
In writing the source program, the programmer must
include statements requesting the desired
functions from the operating system. These
statements are discussed in the control
program services publication. The
OS Introduction publication provides further
information on operating system relationships.
Input/output considerations are discussed in
the data management publication.

Section 1:

Introduction

5

SECTION 2:

This section presents information about
assembler language coding conventions and
assembler source statement structure
addressing.

ASSEMBLF~

LANGUAGE CODING CONVENTIONS

This subsection discusses the general
coding conventions associated with use of
the aS~Jen:Ller languaqe.

A source program is a sequence of source
statements that are punched into cards. The
standard card form, IBM 6509 (shown in Figure
2-2), can be used for punching source statements. These statements may be written on
the standard coding form, GX28-6509 (shown
in Figure 2-1), provided by IBM. One line
of coding on the form is punched into one
card. The vertical columns on the form
correspond to card columns. Space is provided
on the form for program identification and
instructions to keypunch operators.
The body of the form (Figure 2-1) is
composed
of two fields:
tbE:! statement
field,
columns
1-71,
and
the
identification-sequence
field,
columns
73-80.
The identi f ication-scqllf~nce field

GENERAL INFOR1ViATION

is not part of a statement and is discussed
following
the
subsection
"Statement
Forwat."
The entries
(i.e., coding) composing a
statement occupy columnu 1-71 of a line
and, if needed, columns 16-71 of one or two
successivE contInuation lines.
continuation Lines
When it is necessary to continue a
statement on another line, the following
rules apply.
1. Write the statement up through column 71.
2. Enter a continuation character (not blank
and not part of the coding) in column 72
of the line.
3. Continue the statement in colwnn 16 of the
next line, leaving columns 1 through 15
blank.
4. If the statement is not finished before
column 71 of the second line, enter a
continuation character in column 72, and
continue in column 16 of the following line.
5. The statement has to be finished before
column 71 of the third line, because the
maximum number of continuation lines is two.
6. Macro instruction can be cdded on as many
lines as are needed.
These rules assume that normal source
statement boundaries are used (see"Statement Boundaries" below).

IBM Syslem 360 Assembler Codmg Form

Figure 2-1.

Codi.ng Form
Section 2:

General Information

7

5.

Statement Boundaries
Source statements are norroally contained
in columns 1-71 of statement lines and
columns 16-71 of any continuation lines.
Therefore, columns 1,
71,
and 16
are
referred to as the "begin," "end," and
"continue" columns, respectively.
(This
convention can be altered by use of the
Input
Format
Control (ICTL)
assembler
ins~ruction discussed later in this
publicatlon.
The continuation character
if
used, always immediately follows the :end"
column.

A description of the name, operation,
operand, and comments entries follows:
Name EntEY-: The name entry is a symbol
created by the programmer to identify a
statement. A name entry is usually optional.
The symbol must consist: of eight
characters or less, and be entered with the
first character appearing in the begin
column. The first character must be
alphabetic.
If the begin column is blank,
the assembler program assumes no name has
been entered. No blanks can appear in
the symbol.

Statement Format
Statements may consist of one to four
entries in the statement field.
They are,
from left to right: a name entry, an
operation entry, an operand entry,
and a
comments entry.
These entries musi
be
separated by one or more blanks
and must
be written in the order stated. '

Ope~3tio~ Ent~:

The operation entry is
the mnemonic operation code specifying the
machine operation, assembler, or macroinstruction
operation
desired.
An
operation entry is mandatory and cannot
appear in a continuation line.
It must
start at least one position to the right of
the begin column. Valid mnemonic operation
codes for machine and assembler operations
are contained in Appendixes D and E of this
publication. Valid operation codes consist
of five characters or fewer for machine or
assembler-instruction operation codes, and
eight
characters
or fewer for macroinstruction operation codes.
No blanks can
appear within the operation entry.

The coding form (Figure 2-1) is ruled to
provide an 8-character name
field,
a
5-character
operation
field
and
a
56-character operand and/or comm~nts field.
If desired, the programmer can disreqard
these . boundaries
and write the name,
operatlon, operand, and comment entries in
other positions,
subject to the following
rules:
1.

The entries must not extend beyond
statement boundaries within a line
(either the conventional boundaries
if no ICTL statement is given or as
designated by the programmer ~ia the
ICTL instru~tion).

2.

The
entries
must
be
in proper
sequence, as stated previously.

3.

The entries must be separated
or more blanks.

aDO

The nalre and operation entries must be
completed in the first line of the
statement, including at least
one
blank following the operation entry.

Operand Entries: Operand entries identify
and descrlbe data to be acted upon by the
instruction, by indicating such things as
storage locations, masks, storage-area
lengths, or types of data.

one

Depending on the needs of the instruction, one or more or no operands can be
written. Operands are required for all
machine instructions, but many assembler
instructions require no operand.

If used, a name entry must be written
starting in the begin column.

Operands must be separated by commas,
and no blanks can intervene between operands and the commas that separate them.

by

-_J

,,;:"' 1Io:,L~:7~'o,

1,

--,

coodo u,6-0 0 o~ofoo 00 oTo oo'~ 0;00000[0000 dio o-IlTc;o 0 uoOjC1Io jj lljo [) O~-~>I;r;For~ooo 00 10'00'00 ~O ort6r~"~"0
O;'ERA<-.C

' ,.

_

;;;;;;; ;1;:'t;';';';r;';~'I·'t"."I"I"IJ';';I';;";';';li"I''1";'I'I';';':':·I'i;'·;;J<;·I'j't,;;·;·'tll;";\";'i'l'';'I"I"II;";'I"I"I"I";'I"'I"t;II';';':'I";';':'I'31'I

2221122211i22212i222212222121222222212211222j22222i1222121.22222212112112212122222222221
,3333333 l,tll,'3 33331333333133-33 1!3] 3

uG.1J~,W

J U 3I ,] 3",3 3

]_"h] 3] ]13 JU 3i3]] 3 313 3 3 3] 3 3 3 3 3 J:J 3 333 3 3J 31

!4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4(4 4 4 4 4 41,14 4 4 t 44 4 4~11 _.I!.~~YSTF._tv1/~O___

i~

+~ 55!t~~~D~:D AS~EM_~ER_CA:D
IcG666566,'b666E,616606616666U6;6'!66666!6666616666~66&66jOI;666'166666166666,66666661&6666666!
T T
T
+
!
~
5 5 5 5 5 5 '1515 5 5 5 5

1

14144444144444444444444444444

5 55555
j

177777 7 7 71 7: 7 7 7 7 7:7\7 I 7 7

777

_

I 7 7 717 7 7 7 7i 7 7 7 7? 7 7 7

; B 8 8 8 8 8 8 8, 8i8 8 8 8 8:818 8 8 8 81'- 8 8 8 8i8 8 8 P 8;8 8 8 8 B!8

a 8 8 8:8

515555515555515555555555555551

7 7) li7 ! 7 11,7 7 11 TIll

8 8 8 8i8 8 8 8 8i8

1

ij

Ba8 8 b ,

1111117il1 7 11 7 7 71

8 8 8 8 8 88 8 8 8 8 alala 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

I~,;: ! ~: ~ :19;,~~:9·1~ s. ,9::~I,j ~ ~ .~~ 319 9 9 9 ~!9 9 9? 9i9 9 9 9 9.J 9 SJ~ 9 9:9 9 1.:4~9 9 ,:; 9 9',R~;S 9ill ',1~'9 9 ~!9 ~I9 ~89 S961}1~1
9 S!9 9 9 9 919 9 9 9 9 91~ 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
'~,f,~ ~I
'IL:: I~ I~): )~'~ ad

1

I

',." 1

.

Figure 2-2.
8

"6 I. 18

,UI, " , 1.7" J.

, .• q

Jell! ,I IJ 1

,j

I'J I!',.' t

4.";' 1

Punched Card Form

',0'."

',',ISC

61&3 ,_

&8 1-9 '"

'I

compared.
The comment entry reminds the
programmer that he is comparing "new sum"
to "old" with this instruction.

The first blank normally indicates the end
of the operand field.
The operands cannot contain embedded
blanks, except as follows:

r------T-----------T----------------------,

IName 1Operation I Operand
I
~------+-----------+----------------------~
ICOMP
NEW SUM TO OLD
L______ ICR
___________ 15,6
______________________
J1

If character representation is
used to specify a constant, a
literal, or immediate data in an
operand, the character string can
contain blanks, e.g., CIA D'.

~

Comment Entries: Comments are descriptive
items of information about the program that
are shown on the program listing. All 256
valid characters (see Character Set in this
section), including blanks can be used in
writing a comment. The entry can follow
the operand entry and must be separated
from it by a blank; each line of comment
entries cannot extend beyond the end
column (column 71).
An entire statement field can be used
for a comment by placing an asterisk in the
begin column. Extensive comment entries
can be written by using a series of lines
with an asterisk in the begin column of
each line or by using continuation lines.
Comment entries cannot fall between a
statement and its continuation line.
In statements where an optional operand
entry is omitted but a comment entry is
des1red, the absence of the operand entry
must be indicated by a comma preceded and
followed by one or more blanks, as follows:

r-------T----------T----------------------,

IName

IOperation IOperand

I

I END

1
~-------+----------+----------------------~

I.,

COMMENT

1

L_______ ~----------~----------------------J

For instructions that cannot contain an
operand entry, this comma is not needed.
Note: Macro prototype statements without
operands will not tolerate comments, even
if a comma is coded as shown above.
For information on rules for the operand
field of different assembler instructions,
refer to the table in Appendix E.
statement Example: The following example
illustrates the use of name, operation,
operand, and comment entries.
A compare
instruction has been named by the symbol
COMP; the operation entry (CR)
is the
mnemonic operation code for a register-toregister compare operation, and the two
operands
(5,6)
designate the two general
registers
whose
contents
are
to be

~

Identification-Sequence Field
The identification-sequence field of the
coding form
(columns 73-80)
is used to
enter program identification ana/or statement sequence characters.
The entry is
optional.
If the field, or a portion of
it, is used for progranl identification, the
identification is punched in the source
cards and reproduced in the printed listing
of the source program.
To aid in keeping source statements in
order, the programmer can number the cards
in this field.
These
characters
are
punched into their respective cards, and
during assembly the programmer may request
the assembler to verify this sequence by
use of the Input Sequence Checking (ISEQ)
assembler instruction. This instruction is
discussed in Section 5, under
Program
Control Instructions.

Summary of St.a.tement Format
The entries in a statement must always
be separated by at least one blank and must
be in the following order: name, operation,
operand(s), comment(s).
Every statement requires an operation
entry.
Name
and comment entries are
optional. Operand entries are required for
all machine instructions and most assembler
instructions.
The name and operation entries must be
completed in the first statement line,
including at least one blank following the
operation entry.
The name and operation entries must not
contain blanks. Operand entries must not
have blanks preceding or following the
commas that separate them.

Section 2:

General Information

9

A name entry must always
begin column.

start

in

If the column after the end column is
blank, the next line must start a new
statement.
If the column after the end
column is not blank, the following line
is treated as a continuation line.
All entries must be contained within the
designated begin, end, and continue column
boundaries.

Source statements are written using
following characters:
Letters

A through Z, and $,

o

#~

the

@

through 9

§.E§cial
Characters + -

,

=

•

* (

• /

t

• One or more operands composed of one or
more expressions, Which, in turn, are
composed of a term or an arithmetic
combination of terms.
Operands
of
machine
instructions
generally represent such things as storage
locations,
general registers,
immediate
data, or constant values.
Operands of
assembler instructions provide the information needed by the assembler program to
perform the designated operation.
Figure 2-3 depicts this structure.
Terms shown in Figure 2-3 are classed as
absolute or relocatable. Terms are absolute or relocatable,
depending on
the
effect of program relocation upon them.
Program relocation is the loading of the
object program into storage locations other
than those originally assigned by
the
assembler. A term is absolute if its value
does not change upon relocation.
A term is
relocatable if its value changes upon relocat.:.ion.

blank

These characters are represented by the
card-punch combinations and internal bit
configurations listed in Appendix A.
In
addition, any of the 256 punch combinations
may be designated anywhere that characters
may appear between paired apostrophes, in
comments, and in macro instruct:ion operands.

AS~EMBLER

An operand entry is:

the

LANGUAGE STRUCTURE

The basic structure of the language can
be stated as follows.
A source statement is composed of:
• A name entry (usually optional).

The following subsection "Terms
and
Expressions" discusses these items as outlined in Figure 2-3.

TEgMS

AND EXPRESSIONS

TEPJIIC

Every term represents a value.
This
value may be assigned by the assembler
(symbols, symbol length attribute, location
counter reference) or may be inherent in
the term
itself
(self-defining
term,
literal).
An arithmetic combination of terms is
reducea to a single value by the assembler.
The following material discusses each
type of term and the rules for its use.

• An operation entry (required).
• An operand entry (usually required).

Symbols

• Comments entry (optional).

A symbol is a character or combination of
characters used to represent locations or
arbitrary values.
Symbols, through their
use in name fields and in operands, provide
the programmer with an efficient way t.o
name and reference a program element.
ThEre are three types of symbols:

A name entry is:
• A symbol.
An operation entry is:
• A mnemonic operation code
a
machine,
assembler,
instruction ..

10

representing
or
macro-

1.
2.
3.

Ordinary symbols.
Variable symbols.
Sequence symbols.

Ordinary symbols, created by the programmer for use as a name entry and/or an
operand, must conform to these rules:

1.

characters may be letters, digits,
a conbination of the two.

The symbol must not consist of more
than
eight characters.
The first
character must be a letter. The other

Is a Symbol
which is an

2.

No special characters may be included
in a symbol.

3.

No blanks are allowed in a symbol.

One or more
Operands that
are composed
of an

Is a Mnemonic
Operation Code

I

I

1

Machine
Instruction

or

Assembler
Instruction

or

1

I

or

Macro
Instruction

I
Exp

or

Exp(Exp)

Exp

or

Exp(Exp, Exp)

Expressi on

.--------,1
Ordinary
Symbol
~
(AT or RT)

I

or
or

Arithmetic
Combination
of Terms

2
~

or
'--

Term

Variable
Symbol

2

which may be
anyone of
the following

Sequence
Symbol

I

I

A Symbol
e.g.,BETA
(AT or RT)

A Selfdefining
Term (AT)

I
A Location
Counter Reference i.e., *
(RT)

A Literal
e.g.,=F'1259'
(RT)

I

I

I

Symbol Length
Attribute Reference e.g.,

Other Symbol.
Attribute
References (A T)

~~~--

2

which may be
anyone of
the following

I
Decimal
e.g.,15

I
Hexadecimal
e.g.,X'C4'

I

AT=Absolute Term

I

I

Binary
e.g.,B'lOl'

Character
e.g.,C'AB9'

RT= Relocatable Term

1 May be generated by combination of variable symbols and assembler language characters. (Conditional assembly only)
2 Conditional assembly only.

Figure 2-3.

Assembler Language structure -- Machine and Assembler Instructions

Section 2:

General Information

11

In the following sections, the term
symbol refers to ordinary symbol.

The value of a symbol may not
tive and may not exceed 22tt-1.

The following are valid symbols:
READER
A23456
X4F2

LOOP2

$A1

S4

#56

The following symbols are
the reasons noted:
256B

invalid,

for

RECORDAREA2
BCD*34

(first
character
is
not
alphabetic)
(more than eight characters)
(contains d special character

IN AREA

(contains a blank)

-

*)

Variable symbols must begin with an
ampersand (&) followed by one to seven
letters and/or numbers, the first of which
must be a letter. Variable symbols are
used within the source program or macro
definition to allow different values to be
assigned to one symbol. A complete discussion of variable symbols appears in
~~ction 6.
Sequence symbols consist of a period (.)
followed by one to seven letters and/or
numbers, the first of which must be a letter.
Sequence symbols are used to indicate
the position of statements within the
source program or macro definition. Through
their use the programmer can vary the
sequence in which statements are processed
by the assembler program.
(See t:he complete
discussion in Section 6.)
NOTE: Sequence symbols and variable symbols
are used only for the macro language and
conditional assembly. Programmers who do
not use these f~atures need not be concerned
with these symbols.
lEFINING SYMBOLS: The assembler assigns a
'Talue to each symbol ,ppearing as a name
,~ntry
in a sourCL statement. The values
,1ssigned to symbols naming storage areas,
instructions, constants, and control sections are the addresses of the leftmost
bytes of the storage fields containing the
odmed items.
Since the addresses of these
items may change upon program relocation,
the symbols naming them are considered
relocat.a ble terms.
A symbol used as a name entry in the
Equate symbol (EQU)
assembler instruction
is assigned the value designated in the
operand entry of the instruction.
Since
the operand entry may represent a relocatabIe
value
or
an
absolute
(i.e.,
nonchanging) value, the symbol is considered a relocatable term or an absolute
term, depending upon the value it is equat(~d to.
12

nega-

A symbol is said to be defined when it
appears as the name of a source statement.
(A special case of symbol definition is
discussed in Section 3, under "Program
Sectioning and Linking.")

@B4

N

be

Symbol definition also involves
the
assignment of a
length attribute to the
symbol.
(The assembler maintains an internal table - the symbol table - in which the
values and attributes of symbols are kept.
When the assembler encounters a symbol in
an operand, it refers to the table for the
values associated with the symbol.)
The
length attribute of a symbol is the length,
in
bytes, of the storage field whose
address is represented by the symbol.
For
example,
a symbol naming an instruction
that occupies four bytes of storage has a
length attribute of 4. Note that there are
exceptions to this rule; for example, in
the case where a symbol has been defined by
an equate to location counter value (EQU *)
or to a self-defining term,
the length
attribute of the symbol is 1. These and
other
exceptions
are noted under the
instructions involved. The length attribute is never affected by a duplication
factor.
PREVIOUSLY DEFINED SYMBOL!:;: Scme instructions require that a symbol appearing in
the operand entry be previously defined.
This simply means that the symbol, before
its use in an operand, must have app2nre1
as a name entry in a prior state"''','~.
GENERAL RESTRICTIONS ON SY1V1BO~;i:_ '1 symOo.L
may be defined only once in an ~ssemDly.
That is, each symbol used as the name of a
statement must be unique within that assembly.
however, a symbol may be used in the
name field more than once as a control
section name (i.e., defined in the STA~T,
CSECT, or DSECT assembler statements described in Section 3) because the coding of
a control section may be suspended and then
resumed at any subsequent point,.
The CSECT
or DSECT statement that resumes the section
must be named by the same symbol that
initially named the section; thus,
the
symbol that nawes the section must be
repeated.
Such usage is not considered to
be duplication of a symbol definition.

Self-Defininq Terms
A self-defining term is one whose value
is
inherent in the term.
It is not
assigned a value by the assembler.
For
example, the decimal self-defining term 15 - represents a value of 15. The length
attribute of a self-defining term is always
1.

There are four types of self-defining
terms: decimal, hexadecimal,
binary,
and
character. Use of these terms is spoken of
as decimal, hexadecimal, binary, or character representation of the machine-language
binary value or bit configuration they
represent.
Self-defining terms are classed as absolute terms, since the values they represent
do not change upon program relocation.
USING SELF-DEFINING TERMS:
~~E::lf-defining
terms are the means of specifying machine
values or bit configurations without equating the values to symbols and using the
symbols.
Self-defining terms may be used to specify such program elements as imITlediate
data, masks,
registers, addresses,
and
address increments.
The type of term selected (decimal,
hexadecimal,
binary, or
character) will depend on what is being
specified.
The use of a self-defining term is quite
distinct from the use of data constants or
literals.
When a self-defining term is
used in a machine-instruction statement,
its value is assembled into the instruction.
When a data constant is referred to
or a literal is specified in the operand of
an instruction,
its address is assembled
into the instruction.
Self-defining terms
are always right-justified; truncation or
padding with zeros if necessary occurs on
the left.

eight-bit mask would consist of
decimal digits.
The maximuITI
hexadecimal term is X' FFFFFF'.

two hexavalue of a

The hexadecima 1 digits
patterns are as follows:

their

0- 0000
1- 0001
2- 0010
3- 0011

8- 1000

S- alOl

9- 1001
A- 1010
B- 1011

6- 0110
7- 0111

bit

C- 1100
D- 1101
E- 1110
F- 1111

A table for converting frow hexadecimal
representation to decimal representation is
provided in Appendix B.
Binary Self-Defin~Term: A binary selfdefining term is written as an unsigned
sequence
of
ls
and
as enclosed in
apostrophes and preceded by the letter D,
as follows:
B'10001101'. This term would
appear in storage as shown,
occupying one
byte.
A binary term may have up to 24 bits
represented.
Binary representation is used primarily
in designating bit patterns of masks or in
logical operations.
The following example illustrates
a
binary term used as a mask in a Test Under
Mask (TM)
instruction.
The contents of
GAMMA are to be tested, bit by bit, against
the pattern of bits represented by the
binary term.

r-------T-----------T---------------------,
IName

Decimal Self-Defining Term:
A
decimal
self-defining term is simply an unsigned
decimal number written as a sequence of
decimal digits.
High-order zeros may be
used (e.g., 007).
Limitations on the value
of the term depend on its use.
For example, a decimal term that designates a
general
register
should have a value
between a and 15; one that represents an
address should not exceed the size of
storage.
In any case, a decimal term may
not consist of more than eight digits, or
exceed 16,777,215 (2 24 -1). A decimal selfdefining term is assembled as its binary
equivalent.
Some examples of decimal selfdefining tenT'S are:
8,
147,
4092,
and
00021.

4- 0100

ano

I Operation

I operand

I

t-------+-----------+---------------------~

IALPHA
L
_______ LITM
___________ LIGA~MA,B'10101101'
_____________________ JI

Character Self-Defining Term: A character
self-defining term consists of one to three
characters enclosed by apostrophes.
It.
must be preceded by the letter C.
All
letters, decimal digits, and special characters may be used in a character term.
In
addition, any of the remainder of the 256
punch combinations may be designated in a
character self-defining term.
Examples of
character self-defining terms are as follows:
C'/'
C'ABC'

C'
(blank)
C'13'

Hexadecimal Self-defining Term: A hexadecimal self-defining term consists of one
to six hexadecimal digits enclosed by
apostrophes and preceded by the letter X:
X'C49' .

Because of the use of apostrophes in the
assembler language and ampersands in the
macro language as syntactic characters, the
following rule must be observed when using
these characters in a character term.

Each hexadecimal digit is assembled as
its four-bit binary equivalent. Thus, a
hexadecintal
term used to represent an

For each apostrophe or ampersand desired
in a character self-defining term, two
apostrophes or ampersands must be written.
For example, the character value A'# would

Section 2:

General Information

13

be written as rAI'N I , while an apostrophe
followed by a blank and another singl~
apostrophe would be written as I I I I I I
Each character in the character sequence
is assembled as its eight-bit code equivalent (see Appendix A). The two apostrophes
or ampersands that must be used to represent an apostr6phe or ampersand within
the character sequence are assembled as an
apostrophe or ampersand.

Location Counter Reference
The Location Counter: A location counter
is- used to a:3sign storage addresses to
progran. statements.
It is the assemblerls
equivalent of the instruction counter in
the computer. As each machine instruction
or data area is assembled, the location
counter is first adjusted to the proper
boundary for the item, if adjustment is
necessary, and then incremented by the
length of the assembled item.
Thus, it
always points to the next available location.
If the statement is named by a
symbol, the value attribute of the symbol
is the value of the location counter after
boundary adjustment, but before addition of
t:.he length.
Th~
assembler n~intains
a
location
counter for each control section of the
prograffi
and
manipulates each location
counter as previously described.
Source
statements for each section are assigned
addresses from the location counter for
that section.
The location counter for
each successively declared control section
assigns locations in consecutively higher
areas of storage. Thus, if a program has
multiple control sections, all statements
iJentified as belonging to the first control section will be assigned from the
location counter for section 1, the statements for the second contrel section will
be assigned from the location counter for
section 2, etc. This procedure is followed
whether the statements from different control sections are interspersed or written
in control section sequence.

The location counter setting can be
controlled by using the START and ORG
assembler instructions, which are described
in Sections 3 and 5. The counter affected
by either of these assembler instructions
is the counter for the control section in
which they appear. The maximum value for
the location counter is 224-1.
The programmer may refer to the current
value of the location counter at any place
in a program by using an asterisk as a term

l4

in an operand. The asterisk represents the
location of the first byte of currently
available storage (i.e., after any required
boundary adjustment). Using an asterisk as
the operand in a machine-instruction statement is the same as placing a symbol in the
name field of the statement and then using
that symbol as an operand of the statement.
Because a location counter is maintained
for each control section, a location counter reference deSignates the location counter for the section in which the reference
appears.
A reference to the location counter may
be made in a literal address constant
(i.e., the asterisk may be used in an
address
constant
specified in literal
form).
The address of the instruction
containing the literal is used for the
value of the location counter. A location
counter reference may not be used in a
statement which requires the use of a
predefined symbol, with the exception of
the EQU and ORG assembler instructions.
Literals
A literal term is one of three basic
ways to introduce data into a program. It
is simply a constant preceded by an equal
sign (=).
A literal represents data rather than a
reference to data.
The appearance of a
literal in a statement directs the assembler program to assemble the data specified
by the literal, store this data in a
"literal pool," and place the address ?f
the storage field containing the data 1n
the operand field of the assembled statement.
Literals provide a means of entering
constants (Buch as numbers for calculation,
addresses, indexing factors, or words or
phrases for printing out a message) into a
program by specifying the constant in the
operand of the instruction in which it is
used.
This is in contrast to using the DC
assembler instruction to enter the data
into the program and then using the name of
the DC instruction in the operand. Only
one
literal is allowed in a machineinstruction statement.
A literal term cannot be combined with
any other terms.
A literal cannot be used as the receiving field of an instruction that modifies
storage.
A literal cannot be specified in a shift
instruction or an I/O instruction (HIO, HDV,
TIO, SIO, SlOP).

When a literal is contained in an instruction, it cannot specify an explicit
base register or an explicit index register.
A literal cannot be specified in an address constant (see Section 5, DC--Define
Constant) .
The instruction coded below shows one
use of a literal.

r-------T-----------T---------------------,
IName

I Operation

IOperand

I

~-------+-----------+---------------------~

ILGAMMA
L
110,
=F' 274'
_______ I ___________
_____________________
JI
~

~

The statement GAMMA is a load instruction using a literal as the second operand.
When assembled,
the second operand of the
instruction will be the address at which
the value F'274' is stored.
NOTE: If a literal operand is a selfdefining term (X,C,B, or decimal) and the
equal sign (=) is omitted, the statement
may assemble without error (See "Using
Self-Defining Terms") .
In general, literals can be used wherever a storage address is permitted as an operand. They cannot, however, be used in
any assembler instruction that requires the
use of a previously defined symbol. Literals are considered relocatable, because the
address of the literal, rather than the
literal itself, will be assembled in the
statement that employs a literal.
The
assembler generates the literals, collects
them, and places them in a specific area of
storage, as explained in the subsection
"The Literal Pool." A literal is not to be
confused with the immediate data in an SI
instruction.
Immediate data is assembled
into the instruction.
Literal Format: The assembler requires a
description of the type of literal being
specified as well as the literal itself.
This descriptive information assists the
assembler in assembling the literal correctly.
The descriptive portion of the
literal must indicate the format of the
constant.
It may also specify the length
of the constant.

Some examples of literals are:
=A(BETA)
=F'1234'
=C'ABC'

The Literal Pool: The literals processed
by the assembler are collected and placed
in a special area called the literal pool,
and the location of the literal# rather
than the literal itself, is assembled in
the statement employing a literal.
The
positioning of the literal pool may be
controlled by the prograwner, if he so
desires.
Unless otherwise specified, the
literal pool is placed at the end of the
first control section.
The programmer may also specify that
multiple literal pools be created.
However, the sequence in which literals are
ordered within the pool is controlled by
the assembler.
Further information
on
positioning the literal pool(s) is in Section 5 under "LTORG--Begin Literal Pool."
Symbol Length Attribute Reference
The length attribute of a symbol may be
used as a term. Reference to the attribute
is made by coding L' followed by the
3ymbol, as in:
L'BETA
The length attribute of BETA will be
substituted for the term. The use of the
length attribute of a symbol defined with
a DC or DS with explicit length given by
an expression is invalid. The following
example illustrates the use of L'symbol
in moving a character constant into either
the high-order or low-order end of a
storage field.
For ease in following the example, the
length attributes of Al and B2 are mentioned. However, keep in mind that the
L'symbol term makes coding such as this
possible in situations where lengths are
unknown.

r-------T-----------V---------------------,
IName

The method of describing and specifying
a constant as a literal is nearly identical
to the method of specifying it in the
operand of a DC assembler instruction. The
major difference is that the literal must
start with an equal sign (=), which indicates to the assembler that a literal
follows.
The reader is referred to the
discussion of the DC assembler instruction
operand format 
J:ants -- E, D, _a~d L: A
floating-point constant is written as a
decimal number. As an option a decimal
exponent may follow.
The number may be an
integer, a fraction, or a mixed number
(i.e., one with integral and fractional
portions). The format of the constant is
as follows:

SHORT FLOATING POINT NUMBER (E)

o

7 8

31

LONG FLOATING POINT NUMBER (D)

J

56 AIT FRACTION

o

7 8

63

EXTENDED FLOATING POINT NUMBER (Ll
HIGH ORDER HALF OF
112 BIT FRACTION

63

LOW ORDER HALF OF
112 BIT FRACTION

7 8

Figure 5-5.

1.

2.

63

Floating-Point External Formats

The number is written as a signed or
unsigned decimal value.
The decimal
point can be placed before, within, or
after the number.
If it is omitted,
the number is assumed to be an integer.
A positive sign is assumed if an unsigned number is specified.
The exponent is optional.
If specified,
it is written immediately after
the number as En, wbere n is an
optionally signed decimal value specifying the exponent of the factor 10.
If an unsigned exponent is specified,
a plus sign is assumed. The range of
the exponent is explained under
"Exponent Modifier" above.

The external format for a floating-point
number has two parts: the portion containing the exponent, which is sometimes called
the characteristic, followed by the portion
containing the fraction, which is sometimes
called the mantissa. Therefore, the number
specified as a floating-point constant must
be converted to a fraction before it can be
translated into the proper format. Figure
5-5 shows the external format of the three
types of floating-point constants.
The type L constant resembles two
contiguous type D constants.
In the type
L constant the sign of the second double
word is the same as the sign of the first.
The characteristic of the second double
word is equal to the characteristic of the

first minus 14, modulo 128. For information on use of the type I, constant see the
OS Assembler (F) Programmer's Guide.
For example, the constant 27.35E2 represents the number 27.35 times 10 to the 2nd.
Represented as a fraction, it would be
.2735 times 10 to the 4th, the exponent
having been modified to reflect the shifting of the decimal point. The exponent may
also be affected by the presence of an
exponent modifier, as explained under
"Operand Subfield 3: Modifiers." Thus, the
exponent is also altered before being
translated into machine format.
In machine format a floating-point number
also has two parts, the signed exponent and
signed fraction.
The quantity expressed by
this number is the product of the fraction
and the number 16 raised to the power of
the exponent.
The exponent is translated into its binary
equivalent in excess 64 binary notation and
the fraction is converted to a binary number. Scaling is performed if specified;
if not, the fraction is normalized (leading
hexadecimal zeros are removed). Rounding of
the fraction is then performed according to
the specified or implied length, and the
number is stored in the proper field.
The
resulting number will not differ from the
exact value by more than one in the last
place. Within the portion of the floatingpoint field allocated to the fraction, the
hexadecimal point is assumed to be to the
left of the leftmost hexadecimal digit, Gnd
the fraction occupies the leftmost portion
of the f.ield.
Negative fractions are
carried in true representation, not in the
twos complement form.

section 5:

Assembler Instruction Statements

45

An implied length of four bytes is
assumed for a short (E) constant and eight
bytes for a long (D) constant. An implied
length of 16 bytes is assumed for an
extended (L) constant. The constant is
aligned at the proper word (E) or double
word (D and L) boundary if a length is
not specified. However, any length up
to and including eight bytes (E and D) or
16 bytes (L) can be specified by a length
modifier.
In this case, no boundary
alignment occurs.
Any of the following statements could be
used to specify 46.415 as a positive,
full-word,
floating-point constant;
the
last is a machine-instruction statement
with a literal operand.
Note that the last
two constants contain an exponent modifier.

r------T-----------T----------------------,
IName

IOperation

IOperand

I

.------+-----------+----------------------~

I
I
I
I
I

I DC

IE' 46. 415 '
I
IE'46415E-3'
I
IE'+464.15F.-1'
I
IF'+.46415E+2'
I
I EE2' .46415'
I
Il ______ LI AE
6 , =EF 2 ' • 4 6 41 5 '
___________ I ______________________
JI
IDC
IDC
IDC
I DC

~

The following would each be generated as
double-word floating-point constants.

If zoned decimal format is specified
(Z),
each decimal digit is translated into
one byte.
Tne translation is done according to the character set shown in Appendix
A. The rightmost byte contains the sign as
well as the rightmost digit.
For packed
decimal format
(P),
each pair of decimal
digits is translated into one byte.
The
rightmost digit and the sign are translated
into the rightmost byte.
The bit configuration for the digits is identical to the
configurations for the hexadecimal digits
0-9
as
shown
in
Section
3
under
"Hexadecimal
Self-Defining
Value." For
both packed and zoned decimals, a plus sign
is translated into the hexadecimal digit C,
and a minus sign into the digit D.
If an even number of packed decimal
digits is specified, one digit will be left
unpaired because the rightmost digit is
paired with the sign.
Therefore,
in the
leftmost byte, the leftmost four bits will
be set to zeros and the rightmost four bits
will contain the odd (first) digit.
If no length modifier is given,
the
implied length for either constant is the
number
of bytes the constant occupies
(taking into account the format~ sign,
and
possible addition of zero bits for packed
decimals).
If a length modifier is given,
the constant is handled as follows:

r-------T-----------T---------------------,
IName

I Operation

I Operand

I

1.

If the constant requires fewer bytes
than the length specifies, the necessary number of bytes is added to the
left.
For zoned decimal format,
the
decimal digit zero is placed in each
added byte.
For packed decimals,
the
bits of each added byte are set to
zero.

2.

If the constant requires more bytes
than the length specifies~ the necessary number of leftmost digits or
pa1rs of digits is dropped, depending
on which format is specified.

.-------+-----------+---------------------~
FLO AT LI ___________
DC
+ 4 ' + 4 6 , - 3. 7 29 , + 473' JI
lI _______
LIDE
_____________________

Decimal Constants -- P and Z:
A
decimal
constant is written as a signed or unsigned
decimal value.
If the sign is omit.ted, a
plus sign is assumed.
The decimal point
may be written wherever desired or may be
omitted.
Scaling and exponent modifiers
may not. be specified f or decimal constants.
The maximum length of a decimal constant is
16 bytes.
No word boundary alignment is
perforll·ed.
The placement of a decin',al point in the
definition does not affect the assembly of
the constdnt in any way,
because,
unlike
fixed-point and floating-point constants, a
decimal constant is not converted to its
binary equivalent.
The fact that a decimal
constant is an integer, a fraction,
or a
mixed number is not pertinent to its generation.
Furtherlliore,
the decimal point is
not assembled into the constant. The programmer may determine proper decimal point
alignment either by defining his data so
that the point is aligned or by selecting
machine-instructions that will operate on
the data properly (i.e.,
shift it for
purposes of alignment).

46

Examples of decimal constant definitions
follow.

r------T-----------T----------------------,

I Name

I Operation

I Operand

I

~------+-----------+----------------------~

I

I

I

I

I DC

I P , +1 . 25 '
I
I Z ' - 543 I
I
IDC
IZ'79.68'
I
I DC
L 3 ' 79 • 68 '
___________ LI P______________________
JI

I DC

L------~

The following statement specifies both
packed and zoned decimal constants. The
length modifier applies to each constant in
the first operand
(i.e.,
to each packed
decimal constant).
Note that a literal
could not specify both operands.

r----------T-----------T------------------,
I Name
I Operation I Operand
I
.----------+-----------+------------------~

I DECIMALS

IDC

IPL8'+25.8,-3874,

I

IL__________ I ___________ 1+2.3',Z'+80,-3.72'1
__________________ J
~

~

The last example illustrates the use
a packed decimal literal.

of

r------T-----------T----------------------,
I Name I Operation I Operand
I
.------+-----------+----------------------~

I ______
L

IUNPK
, +25'
___________ I OUTAREA,=PL2
______________________
JI

~

value of the expression may be 2 31 -1.
The
value is then truncated on the left, if
necessary, to the specified or implied
length of the field and assembled into the
rightmost bits of the field.
The implied
length of an A-type constant is four bytes"
and alignment is to a full-word boundary
unless a length is specified, in which case
no alignment will occur. The length that
may be specified depends on the type of
expression used for the constant; a length
of .1 to 4 bytes may be used for an
absolute expression, while a length of only
3 or 4 may be used for a relocatable or
complex relocatable expression.

~

Address Constants: An address constant is
a storage address that is translated into a
constant. Address constants can be used
for initializing base registers to facilitate the addressing of storage. Furthermore r they provide a means of communicating
between control sections of a multisection
program. However, storage addressing and
control section communication are also
dependent on the use of the USING assembler
instruction and the loading of registers.
Coding examples that illustrate these considerations are provided in Section 3 using
"Programming with the USING Instruction."

In the following examples, the field
generated from the statement named ACON
contains four constants, each of which
occupies four bytes. Note that there is a
location counter reference in one.
The
value of the location counter will be the
~ddress of the first byte allocated to
the
fourth constant.
The second
statement
shows the same set of constants specified
as
literals
(i.e.,
address
constant
literals) •
~----i------T-------------------------------)

1
1 Oper- 1
1
I
1
1
1
a tion 1L Operand
1L Name
____ J1_______
_______________________________ 11
1
I

1

An address constant, unlike other types
of constants, is enclosed in parentheses.
If two or more address constants are specified in an operand, they are separated by
commas, and the entire sequence is enclosed
by parentheses. There are five types of
address constants: A, Y, S, Q and V. A
relocatable address constant may not be
specified with bit lengths.
complex Relocatable Expressions: A complex
relocatable expression can only be used to
specify an A-type or Y-type address constant. These expressions contain two or
more unpaired relocatable terms
and/or
negative relocatable terms in addition to
any absolute or paired relocatable terms
that may be present. A complex relocatable
expression might consist of extern~l symbols and designate an address in an independent assembly that is to be linked and
loaded with the assembly containing the
address constant.
A-Type Address Constant: This constant is
specified as an absolute, relocatable, or
complex relocatable expression.
(Remember
that an expression may be single term or
multiterm.) The value of the expression is
calculated to 32 bits as explained in
Section 2 with one exception: the maximum

1

ACONI DC
I

I

.

I

IA(I08,LOP,END-STRT,*+4096)

:

1

I

:I- ____ :- LM
l4,7,=A(108,LOP,END-STRT,*+4096)1
______ 1- __________ - - - __ - - - __ - - __ --_----.1
.~

Note: When the location counter reference
occurs in a literal, as in the LM instruction above, the value of the location
counter is the address of the first byte of
the instruction.
Y-Type Address constant: A Y-type address
constant has much in conunon with the A-type
constant. It too is specified as an absolute, relocatable, or complex relocatable
expression. The value of the expression is
also calculated to 32 bits as explained in
Section 2.
However, the maximum value of
the expression may be only 2 15 -1.
The
value is then truncated, if necessary, to
the specified or implied length of the
field and assembled into the right-most
bits of the field.
The implied length of a
y-type constant is two bytes, and alignment
is to a half-word boundary unless a length
is specified, in which case no alignment
will occur. The maximum length of a Y-type
address constant is two bytes.
If length
specification is used, a length of two
bytes may be designated for a relocatable
or complex expression and .1 to 2 bytes for
an absolute expression.
. ; . 1 ,.,)

cr.
.. ...

Section 5:

-

1.

~

... .t: . .l. ,ltl

.,. •
I.'

Assembler Instruction Statements

47

Warning:
Specification of relocatable Ytype address constants should be avoided in
programs
destined
to
be executed on
machines having more than 32,767 bytes of
storage capacity.
In any case Y-type relocatable address constants should not be
used in programs to be executed under
Operating System/360 control.
Address
Constant:
The
S-type
address constant is used to store
an
address in base-displacement form.

~-Type

The
ways:

constant

may

be

specified in two

1.

As an absolute or relocatable
sion, e.g., S(BETA).

expres-

2.

As two absolute expressions, the first
of which represents the displacement
value and the second, the base register, e.g." S(400(13».

The address value represented by the
expression in (1) will be converted by
the assembler into the proper base register
and displacement value. An S-type constant
is assembled as a half word and aligned on
a half-word boundary.
The leftmost four
bits of the assembled constant represents
the base register designation, the remaining 12 bits the displacement value.
If length specification is used, only
two bytes may be specified. S-type address
constants may not be specified as literals.

V~!YQe

Address Constant: This constant is
used to reserve storage for the address of
an external symbol that is used for effecting branches to other programs.
The constant may not be used for external data
references within an overlay program.
The
constant is specified as one relocatable
symbol, which need not be identified by an
EXTRN statement. Whatever symbol is used is
assumed to be an external symbol by virtue
of the fact that it is supplied in a V-type
address constant.
To suppress the automatic library call
mechanism of the linkage editor for a
constant identified in a V-type address constant, the programmer can identify it in a
WXTRN statement (Assembler F only).
Note that specifying a symbol as the
operand of a V-type constant does not
constitute a definition of the symbol for
this assembly. The implied length of a
V-type address constant is four bytes, and
boundary alignment is to a full word.
A
length modifier may be used to specify a
length of either three or four bytes,
in
which case no such boundary
alignment
occurs.
In the following example, 12 bytes
will be reserved, because there are three
symbols.
The value of each assembled constant will be zero until the program is
loaded.
It must be emphasized that a Vtype address constant of length less than 4
can and will be processed by the Assembler
but cannot be handled by the Linkage Editor.

r--------T-----------T--------------------1

I Name
~-Type Address Constant (Assembler F only):
This constant is used to reserve storage
for the offset of an external dummy
section. This offset is added to the
address of the block of storage allocated
t,o external dUmmy sections to access the
desired section. The constant is specified
as a relocatable symbol which has been
previously defined in a DXD or DSECT statement. The implied length of a Q-type
address constant is four bytes and boundary
alignment is to a full word; a length of
1-4 bytes may be specified. No bit length
specification is permitted in a Q-type
constant.
In the following example the
constant VALUE has been previously defined
in a DXD or DSECT statement. To access
VALUE the value of A is added to the base
address of the block of storage allocated
for external dummy sections. Q-·type address constants may not be specified in
literals.

r--------T-----------T--------------------,

I Name

IOperation

I Operand

I

~--------+-----------+--------------------~

IA
L
________

48

IDC
___________ IQ(VALUE)
____________________ JI

~

~

I Operation

I Operand

I

~--------+--------~--+--------------------~

I ________
VCONST
L

I DC
(SORT, MERGE, CALC)
___________ I V
____________________
JI

~

~

DS -- DEFINE STORAGE
The DS instruction is used to reserve
areas of storage and to assign names to
those areas.
The use of this instruction
is the preferred way of symbolically defining storage for work areas,
input/output
areas,
etc.
The size of a storage area
that can be reserved by using the DS
instruction is limited only by the maximum
value of the location counter.

r----------T-----------T------------------,

I Name
I Operation I Operand
I
~----------+-----------+------------------~
I Any sym- I DS
lOne or more opI
I bol or
I
I erands, separated I
I blank
I
Iby commas,writI
Iten in the forI
I
I
I
I
Imat described in I
Ithe following
I
I
I
IL__________ LI ___________ I __________________
text
JI
~

The format of the DS operand is identical to that of the DC operand; exactly the
same subfields are employed and are written
in exactly the same sequence as they are in
the DC operand. Although the formats are
identical, there are two differences in the
specification of subfields. They are:
1.

2.

The specification of data (subfield 4)
is optional in a DS operand, but it is
mandatory in a DC operand.
If the
constant is specified, it must be
valid.
The maximum length that may be specified for character (C) and hexadecimal
(X) field types is 65,535 bytes rather
than 256 bytes.

If a DS operand specifies a constant in
subfield 4, and no length is specified in
subfield 3, the assembler determines the
length of the data and
reserves
the
appropriate amount of storage.
It does not
assemble the constant.
The ability to
specify data and have the assembler calculate the storage area that
would
be
required for such data is a convenience to
the programmer.
If he knows the general
format of the data that will be placed in
the storage area during program execution,
all he needs to do is show it as the fourth
subfield in a DS operand. The assembler
then determines the correct amount of storage to be reserved,
thus relieving the
programmer of length considerations.
If the DS instruction is named by a
symbol, its value attribute is the location
of the leftmost byte of the reserved aFea.
The length attribute of the symbol is the
length (implied or explicit) of the type of
data specified.
Should the DS have a
series of operands,
the length attribute
for the symbol is developed from the first
item in the first operand. Any positioning
required for aligning the storage area to
the proper type of boundary is done before
the address value is determined. Bytes
skipped for alignment are not set t.o zero.

Each field type
(e.g.,
hexadecimal,
character, floating-point)
is associated
with certain characteristics (these are
summarized in Appendix F). The associated
characteristics will determine which fieldtype code the programmer selects for the DS
operand and what other information he adds,
notably
a
length
specification or a
duplication factor.
For example, the E
floating-point field and the F fixed-point
field both have an implied length of four
bytes.
The leftmost byte is aligned to a
full-word
boundary.
Thus,
either code
could be specified if it were desired to
reserve four bytes of storage aligned to a
full-word boundary. To obtain a length of
eight bytes, one could specify either the E
or F field type with a length modifier of
eight. However, a duplication factor would
have to be used to reserve a larger area,
because the maximum length specification
for either type is eight bytes. Note also
t.hat specifying length would cancel any
special boundary alignment.

In contrast, packed and zoned decimal (P
and Z), character (C), hexadecimal (X), and
binary (B) fields have an implied length of
one byte. Any of these codes,
if used,
would have to be accompanied by a length
modifier, unless just one byte is to be
reserved.
Although no alignment occurs,
the use of C and X field types permits
greater latitude in length specifications,
the maximum for either type being 65,535
bytes.
(Note that this differs from the
maximum for these types in a DC instruction.)
Unless a field of one byte is
desired, either the length must be specified for the C, X, P, Z, or B field types,
or else the data must be specified (as the
fourth subfield), so that the assembler can
calculate the length.
To define four la-byte fields and one
lOa-byte field, the respective DS statements might be as follows:

Section 5:

Assembler Instruction Statements

49

r------T-----------T----------------------,

IFIELD IDS
1 4 CL10
I
lI AREA
______ LI DS
___________ LI CL100
______________________ JI

DEFINING FIELDS OF AN AREA: A DS instruction with a duplication factor of zero can
be used to assign a name to an area of
storage
without actually reserving the
area. Additional DS and/or DC instructions
may then be used to reserve the area and
assign names to fields within the area (and
generate constants if DC is used).

Although FIELD might have been specified
as one 40-byte field, the preceding definition has thE~ advantage of providing FIELD
with a length attribute of 10. This would
be pertinent when using FIELD as an SS
machine-instruction operand.

For example, assume that SO-character
records are to be read into an area for
processing and that each record has the
following format:

Additional examples of OS statements are
shown below:

Positions
Positions
Positions
Positions
Positions

I Name

I Operation

I Operand

I

~------+-----------+----------------------~

r-----T---------T-------------------------,

IName IOperationlOperand

I

~-----+---------+-------------------------~

lONE IDS
ICL80(one 80-byte field,
I
I
I
I length attribute of 80 I
I TWO IDS
180C(80 one-byte fields,
I
I
I
I length attribute of one I
ITHREEIDS
16F(six full words, length I
I
I
I attribute of four)
I
I1i'OUR IDS
ID(one double word, lengthl
I
I
I attribute of eight)
I
IFIVE IDS
1 4H(four half-words,
I
I
I
I length attribute of
I
Il _____ LI _________ LI _________________________
two)
JI

Note: A DS statement causes the storage
area to be reserved but not set to zeros.
No assumption should be made as to the
contents of the reserved area.

5-10
11-30
31-36
47-54
55-62

Payroll Number
Employee Name
Date
Gross Wages
Withholding Tax

The following example illustrates how DS
instructions might be used to assign a name
to the record area, then define the fields
of the area and allocate the storage for
them. Note that the first statement names
the entire area by defining the symbol
RDAREAi the statement gives RDAREA a length
attribute of 80 bytes, but does not reserve
any storage. Simi larl y., the fifth statement names a six-byte area by defining the
symbol DATE; the three subsequent statements actually define the fields of DATE
and allocate storage for them. The second,
ninth, and last statements are used for
spacing purposes and, therefore, are not
named.

r-------T-----------T---------------------,
IName

I Operation

I Operand

I

~-------+-----------+---------------------i

QEecial Uses of the Duplication Factor
I9RCING ALIGNMENT:
The location counter
can be forced to a double-word, full-word,
or half-word
boundary
by
using
the
appropriate field type (e.g., D, F, or H)
with a duplication factor of zero.
This
method may be used to obtain boundary
alignment that. otherwise would not be provided.
For example, the following statem€mts would set the location counter to the
nE~xt double-word boundary and then
reserVe
storage space for a 128-byte field (whose
l€~ftmost byte would
be on a double-word
boundary).

r-----T-----------T-----------------------,

IName IOperation

I Operand

I

~-----+-----------+-----------------------i

I

IDS

10D

I

lIAREA
_____ LIDS
___________ LI CL128
_______________________ JI

50

IRDAREA IDS
OCL80
I
IDS
CL4
IPAYNO IDS
CL6
I NAME
IDS
CL20
I DATE
IDS
OCL6
I DAY
IDS
CL2
I MONTH IDS
CL2
I YEAR
IDS
CL2
I
IDS
CL10
I GHOSS IDS
CL8
IFEDTAX IDS
CL8
Il _______ LIDS
CL1S
___________ L ____________________
_

CCW -- DEFINE CHANNEL COMMAND WORD
The CCW instruction provides a convenient way to define and generate an eightbyte channel command word aligned at a
double-word boundary.
CCW will cause any
bytes skipped to be zeroed.
The internal
machine format of a channel corrmand word is
shown in Table 5-1.

Table 5-1.

Channel Command Word

r-----T-------T---------------------------,
I Usage
1

32-35
0100

36-39
1000

IByte I Bits

~-----+-------+---------------------------~

I Command code
I
8-31
I Data address
1
32-36 1 Flags
1
I
37-39 I Must be zero
1
16
40-47 I Set to zero
I
17-8
48-63 I ___________________________
Count
L_____ I _______
JI
11
12-4
15

I 0-7

1
I
1
I

~

If there is a symbol in the name field
of the CCW instruction, it is assigned the
address value of the leftmost byte of the
channel command word. The length attribute
of the symbol is 8.

~

format
The
statement is:

of

the

CCW

instruction

r--------T---------T----------------------,
IName
I operation I Operand
I
~--------+---------+----------------------~

IAny sym-ICcW
IFour operands,
1
Ibo1 or 1
Iseparated by commas,
1
Ib1ank
1
Ispecifying the con1
I
1
Itents of the channel 1
I
I
I command word in
1
1
1
Ithe format
1
I
I
Idescribed in the
1
1L ________ I _________ Ifo1lowing
text
______________________
J1
~

~

All four operands must appear. They are
written, from left to right, as follows:

LISTING CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS
The listing control instructions are
used to identify an assembly listing and
assembly output cards, to provide blank
lines in an assembly listing, and to designate how much detail is to be included in
an assembly listing.
In no case
are
instructions or constants generated in the
object program. Listing control statements
with the exception of PRINT are not printed
in the listing.
NOTE: TITLE, SPACE, and EJECT statements
will not appear in the source listing
unless the statement is continued onto
another card. Then the first card of the
statement is printed. However, any of
these three types of statements, if
generated as macro instruction expansion,
will never be listed regardless of
continuation.

1.

An absolute expression that specifies
the command code. This expression's
value is right-justified in byte 1.

2.

An
expression specifying the data
address. This value is treated as a
3-byte A-type constant. The value of
this expression is in bytes 2-4.

TITLE -- IDENTIFY ASSEMBLY OUTPUT

An absolute expression that specifies
the flags for bits 32-36 and zeros for
bits 37-39. The value of this expression is right-justified in byte 5.
(Byte 6 is set to zero.)

The TITLE instruction enables the programmer to identify the assembly listing
and assembly output cards. The format of
the TITLE instruction statement is as follows:

3.

4.

An absolute expression that specifies
the count. The value of this expression is right-justified in bytes 7-8.

The following
statement:

is

an

example of a CCW

~

r-----T-----------T-----------------------,
IOperand
I

IName 10peration

~-----+-----------+-----------------------~

IL _____ ICCW
___________ 12,READAREA,X'48',80
_______________________ JI
~

r---------r----------r---------------------'

I Name
: Operation I Operand
:
~----_----~----------l---------------------,
I Special I TITLE
: A sequence of char- I
I sequenc~ ~
I acters, enclosed in :
I or vari- I
I apostrophes
I
I able sym-I
I
I
I
I
I
I bo1 or
I
I
I
________
__________
L
_____________________
I blank!
I
I

~

Note that the form of the third operand
sets bits 37-39 to zero, as required. The
bit pattern of this operand is as follows:

~L

~

The name field may contain a special
symbol of from one to four alphabetic or
numeric characters in any combination. The
contents of the name field are punched into
columns 73-76 of all the output cards for
the program except those produced by the
PUNCH and REPRO assembler instructions.
Only the first TITLE statement in a program
may have a special symbol or a variable symbol in the name field.
The name field of
all subsequent TITLE statements must contain
either a sequence symbol or a blank.

Section 5:

Assembler Instruction Statements

51

The operand field may contain up to 100
characters enclosed in apostrophes. Special consideration must be given to representing apostrophes and ampersands as
characters.
Each single apostrophe
or
ampersand desired as a character in the
constant must be represented by a pair of
apostrophes or ampersands. Only one apostrophe or ampersand appears in storage.
The contents of the operand field are
printed at the top of each page of the
assembly listing.
A

program may contain more than one
statement. Each TITLE statement provides the heading for pages in t.he assembly
listing that follow it, until another TITLE
statement
is
encountered.
Each TITLE
statement causes the listing to be advanced
to a new page (before the heading is
printed).
,]~ITLE

For example, if the following statement
is the first TITLE statement to appear in a
program:

r------T-----------T----------------------,

lName

I Operation

I Operand

I

~------+-----------+----------------------i
lIPGM1
______

I TITLE
'FIRST HEADING'
___________ I ______________________
JI

~

~

then PGM1 is punched into all of the output
cards (columns 73-76) and this heading
appears at the top of each subsequent page:
PGMI FIRST HEADING.
If the following statement occurs later
in the same program:
r------T~----------T----------------------,

I Name

I Operation

I Operand

I

~------+-----------+----------------------i

IL______ I TITLE
NEW HEADING'
___________ I'A
______________________
JI
~

~

r---------r----------r--------------------,
Name
I Operation I Operand
I

I

L---------L----------t--------------------~
I
I Not used; should be II
A seI EJECT
I quence
I
: blank
I
I symbol
I
I
I
IL or
blank JI___________ I ____________________ J I
________
II

~

If the line before the EJECT statement
appears at the bottom of a page, the EJECT
statement has no effect. Two EJECT statements may be used in succession to obtain a
blank page. A TITLE instruction followed
immediately by an EJECT instruction will
produce a page with nothing but the operand
entry (if any) of the TITLE instruction.
Text following the EJECT instruction will
begin at the top of the next page.

SPACE -- SPACE LISTING
The SPACE instruction is used to insert
one or more blank lines in the listing.
The format of the SPACE instruction statement is as follows:

r---------r----------T--------------------,
Name
I Operation I Operand
I

I

l _________ ~----------~--------------------~

: A se: SPACE
I quence
I
: symbol
I
_________
I or
blank IL __________
~

: A decimal value
I or blank

:

I
I
I ____________________ I

I

~

~

A decimal value is used to specify the
number of blank lines to be inserted in the
assembly listing. A blank operand causes
one blank line to be inserted. If this
value exceeds the number of lines remaining
on the listing page, the statement will
have the same effect as an EJECT statement.

then, PGM1 is still punched into the output
cards, but each following page begins with
the heading: PGMI A NEW HEADING .
.!'igte:
The sequence number of the cards in
the output deck is contained in columns
77-80.

EJECT -- START NEW PAGE

PRINT -- PRINT OPTIONAL DATA
The PRINT instruction is used to control
printing of the assembly listing.
The
format of the PRINT instruction statement
is:

r---------r----------T--------------------,

The EJECT instruction causes the next
line of the listing to appear at the top of
a new page. This instruction provides a
convenient way to separate routines in the
p:rogram listing... The format of the EJECT
instruction statement is as follows:
5:2

I Name
I Operation I Operand
I
L _________ ~----------!--------------------~

: A seI PRINT
lOne to three
I
I quence
I
I operands
I
I symbol
:
I
:
_________
IL or
blank I __________ !I ____________________ I
~

~

The one to three operands may include an
operand from each of the following groups
in any sequence:
1.

2.

- A listing is printed.

OFF

- No listing is printed.

GEN

- All statements generated by
macro-instructions are printed.

NOGEN

- Statements generated by macroinstructions are not printed
with the exception of MNOTE
which will print regardless of
NOGEN. However, the macroinstruction itself will appear
in the listing.

Constants are printed out
full in the listing.

.------+---~-------+----------------------~

Il ______ I ___________
PRINT
I ______________________
NODATA
JI
~

ON

DATA

3.

r------T-----------T----------------------,
IName I Operation IOperand
I
~

is the last PRINT statement to appear
before the DC statement; only eight bytes
of zeros are printed in the assembly listing.
Whenever an operand is omitted, it is
assumed to be unchanged and
continues
according to its last specification.
The hierarchy
ments is:

of

1.

ON and OFF

2.

GEN and NOGEN

3.

DATA and NODATA

print control state-

in

NODATA - Only the leftmost eight bytes
are printed on the listing.
A program may contain any number of
PRINT statements. A PRINT statement controls the printing of the assembly listing
until another PRINT statement is encountered. Each option remains in effect
until the corresponding opposite option is
specified.
Until the first PRINT statement (if any)
is encountered, the following is assumed:

r------T-----------T----------------------,
I Name I Operation I Operand
I

Thus with the following
would be printed.

statement

nothing

r------T-----------T----------------------,
I Operation IOperand
I

I Name

.------+-----------+----------------------~

I

l ______

I ___________
PRINT
IOFF,
DATA, GEN
______________________
JI

~

PROGRAM CONTROL

~

INSTRUCT!Q~e

~------+-----------+----------------------~

lI ______

I ___________
PRINT
I ______________________
OR, NODATA.,GEN
JI

~

~

For example, if the statement:

r------T-----------T----------------------,
I Operation I Operand
I

I Name

~------+-----------+----------------------~

Il ______ I DC
00'
___________ I XL256'
______________________
JI
~

appears in a
are assembled.

~

The program control instructions are
used to specify the end of an assembly, to
set the location counter to a value or word
boundary, to insert previously written coding in the program, to specify the placement of literals in storage, to check the
sequence of input cards, to indicate statement format, and to punch a card. Except
for the CNOP and COpy instructions, none of
these
assembler
instructions
generate
instructions or constants in the object
program.

program" 256 bytes of zeros
If the statement:

r------T-----------T----------------------,
I Operation I Operand
I

I Name

ICTL -- INPUT FORMAT CONTROL

~------+-----------+----------------------~

Il ______ I PRINT
DATA
___________ I ______________________
JI
~

~

is the last PRINT statement to appear
before the DC statement, all 256 bytes of
zeros are printed in the assembly listing.
However, if:

The ICTL instruction allows the programmer to alter the normal format of his
source program statements. The ICTL statement must precede all other statements in
the source program and may be used only
once. The format of the ICTL instruction
statement is as follows:

Section 5:

Assembler Instruction Statements

53

r-------T-----------T---------------------,

I Name
I Operation I Operand
I
~-------+-----------+-------~-------------~
IBlank IICTL
Il~3.dec1mal self-de- I
If1n1ng values of the I
I
I
l _______ ~ ___________ ~!Qf~_E~~~2

___________ J

Operand b specifies the begin column of
the source statement. It must always be
specified, and must be within 1-40, inclusive. Operand e specifies the end column
of the source statement. The end column,
when specified, must be within 41-80, inclusive; when not specified, it is assumed
1:0 be 71.
The end column must not be less
than the begin column +5. The column after
the end column is used to indicate whether
the next card is a continuation card.
Operand c specifies the continue column of
the source statement. The continue column,
when specified, must be within 2-40 and
must be greater than b.
If the continue
column is not specified, or if column 80 is
specified as the end column, the assembler
assumes that there are no continuation
cards, and all statements are contained on
a single card. The operand forms b"c and
h, are invalid.

The operands 1 and r,
respectively,
specify the leftmost and rightmost columns
of the field in'" the input cards to be
checked. Operand r must be equal to or
greater than operand 1.
Columns to be
checked must not be between the begin and
end columns.
Sequence checking begins with the first
card following the ISEQ statement. Comparison of adjacent cards makes use of the
eight-bit
internal
collating sequence.

Each card checked must
be higher than the preceding card.
An ISEQ statement with a blank operand
terminates the operation.
(Note that this
ISEQ statement is also sequence checked.)
Checking may be resumed with another ISEQ
statement.
Sequence checking is only performed on
statements contained in the source program.
Statements inserted by the COpy assemblerinstruction or generated by
a
macroinstruction are not checked for sequence.
Also macro-definitions in a macro library
are not checked.
PUNCH -- PUNCH A CARD

If no ICTL statement is used in the
source program~ the assembler assumes that
1, 71, and 16 are the begin, end, and
continue columns, respectively.
The next example designates the begin
column as column 25.
Since the end column
is not specified,
it is assumed to be
column 71. No continuation cards are recognized because the continue column is not
specified.

r------T-----------T----------------------,1
I Name I Operation 1Operand
~------+-----------+----------------------i
1
ICTL
125
L ______ 1___________
______________________ JI
~

r-------T-----------T---------------------,
I Name
IOperation IOperand
I
.-------+-----------+---------------------i
I A se- I PUNCH
11 to 80 characters
I
1 quence I
f symbol I

I enclosed in apos1trophes

I:

I
1

IL ~~ank
_____ __1___ ______________________________ JI

~

ISEQ -- INPUT SEQUENCE CHECKING
The ISEQ instruction is used to
check the sequence of input cards. (A
sequence error is considered serious, but
the assembly is not terminated.)
The
format of the ISEQ instruction statement
is as follows:

r-----T----------T------------------------,

IName IOperation IOperand
1
~-----+----------+-------7----------------i
I Blankl ISEQ
1~o . declInal self-deI
1
1f1n1ng values of the
I
I

l _____ ~ ___________ ~fQ!UL!.L!1._Q!_!2!~!:!~ ______ J

54

The PUNCH assembler-instruction causes
the data in the operand to be punched into
a card.
One PUNCH statement produces one
punched card. As many PUNCH statements may
be used as are necessary. The format is:

Using
character
representation, the
operand is written as a string of up to 80
characters enclosed in apos"trophes. All
characters,
including blank, are valid.
The position immediately to the right of
the left apostrophe is regarded as column
one of the card to be punched. Substitution is performed for variable symbols in
the operand. Special consideration must be
given to representing
apostrophes
and
ampersands as characters. Each apostrophe
or ampersand desired as a character in the
constant must be represented by a pair of
apostrophes or ampersands. Only one apostrophe or ampersand appears in storage.
PUNCH statements may occur
anywhere
within a program, except before macro definitions.
They may occur within a macro
definition but not between the end of a

macro definition and the beginning of the
next macro definition.
If a PUNCH statement occurs before the first control section, the resultant card will precede all
other cards in the object program card
deck; otherwise the card will be punched in
place. No sequence number or identification is punched in the card.
REPRO -- REPRODUCE FOLLOWING CARD
The REPRO assembler-instruction causes
data on the followinq statement line to be
punched into a card.
The data is not
processed; it is punched in a card, and no
substitution is performed for variable symbols. No sequence number or identification
is punched on the card. One REPRO instruction produces one punched card. The REPRO
instruction may not appear before a macro
definition.
REPRO statements that occur
before all statements composing the first
or only control section will punch cards
which precede all other cards of the object
deck. The format is:

r--------,-----------,--------------------,
I Operation I Operand
I

I Name

~--------~-----------1--------------------~
I REPRO
I Blank
:
I quence
I
I
I
I symbol
I
I
I
: or
____________________
blank:
I____________________ JI
~

~

I A se-

The line to be reproduced may contain
any combination of up to 80 valid characters. Characters may be entered starting
in column 1 and continuing through col unm
Column 1 of the line
80 of the line.
corresponds to column 1 of the card to be
punched.
ORG -- SET LOCATION COUNTER
The ORG instruction is
setting of the location
current control section.
ORG instruction statement

used to alter the
counter for the
The format of the
is:

r-------T-----------T---------------------,
I Name

I Operation

I Operand

I

~A-se~--+-----------+---------------------~

I
IORG
I quenbce I
I sym 0 l I

IA relocatable exI pression or blank

I

I

I

The location counter is set to the value
of the expression in the operand.
If the
operand is omitted, the location counter is
set to the next available (unused) location
for that control section.
An ORG statement cannot be used to
specify a location below the beginning of
the control section in which it appears.
The following is invalid if it appears less
than 500 bytes from the beginning of the
current control section.

r------T-----------T----------------------,

IName

I Operation

I Operand

I

~------+-----------+----------------------~

I
I
I
I
*-500
IL______ LIORG
___________ I ______________________
JI
~

If it is desired to reset the location
counter to the next available byte in the
current control section, the following
statement would be used:

r------T-----------T----------------------,
IName

I Operation

IOperand

I

~------+-----------+----------------------~
IL______ LIORG
___________ LI _______________ . ______ JI

If previous ORG statements have reduced
the location counter for the purpose of
redefining a portion of the current control
section, an ORG statement with an omitted
operand can then be used to terminate the
effects of such statements and restore the
location counter to its highest setting:
Note: Through use of the ORG statement two
instructions may be given the same location
counter values.
In such a case the second
instruction will not always eliminate the
effects of the first instruction. Consider
the following example:
ADDR
B

DC A(LOC)
ORG i'-4
DC C'BETA'

In this example the value of B (BETA) will
be destroyed by the relocation of ADDR
during linkage editing.

I

I

1
l ~~ank
_______ Il ___________ L ____________________ JI

Any symbols in the expression must have
been
previously defined.
The unpaired
relocatable symbol must be defined in the
same control section in which the ORG
statement appears.

LTORG -- BEGIN LITERAL POOL
The LTORG instruction causes all literals since the previous LTORG (or start of
the program) to be assembled at appropriate
boundaries starting at the first doubleword
boundary
following
the
LTORG
statement. If no literals follow the LTORG
statement, alignment of the next instruction (which is not a LTORG instruction)
will occur. Bytes skipped are not zeroed.
The format of the LTORG instruction statement is:

Section 5:

Assembler Instruction Statements

55

r--------T-----------T--------------------,
I Name
I Operation I Operand
I
.--------+-----------+--------------------i
I Symbol
I LTORG
I Not used
I
lor

I

blank
lI ________

I

I

I ___________ I ____________________ JI

~

~

The symbol represents the address of the
first byte of the literal pool.
It has a
length attribute of 1.
The literal pool is organized into four
segments within which the literals are
stored in order of appearance, dependent on
the divisibility properties of their object
lengths (dup factor times total explicit
or implied length). The first segment
contains all literals whose object length
is a multiple of eight. Those remaining
literals with lengths divisible by four
are stored in the second segment.
The
third segment holds the remaining evenlength literals.
Any literals left over
have odd lengths and are stored in the
fourth segment.
Since each literal pool begins at a
double-word boundary, this guarantees that
all segment one literals are double-word,
segment two full-word, and segment three
half-word aligned, with no space wasted
except, possibly, at the pool origin.
Literals from the following statement
are in the pool, in the segments indicated
by the circled numbers, where ® means
mUltiple of eight, etc.,
MVC
SH
LM
IC
.AD

A(12) ,=3F'I'
3,=H'2'
O,3,=2F'l,2'
2,=XLI'I'
2,=0'2'

@

®@
CD

®

£p'ecial Addressing Consideration
Any literals used after the last LTORG
statement in a
program are placed at the
end of the first control section.
If there
are no LTORG statements in a program,
all
literals used in the program are placed at
the end of the first control section.
In
these circumstances the programmer must
ensure that the first control section is
always addressable.
This means that the
base address register for the first control
section should not be changed through usage
in subsequent control sections.
If the
programmer does not wish to reserve a
register for t.his purpose, he may place a
L'rORG statement at the end of each control
section thereby ensuring that all literals
appearing in that section are addressable.

56

Duplicate Literals
If duplicate literals occur within the
range controlled by one LTORG statement,
only one literal is stored.
Literals are
considered duplicates only if their specifications are identical. A literal will be
stored, even if it appears to duplicate
another literal, if it is an A-type address
constant containing any reference to the
location counter.
The following examples illustrate how
the assembler stores pairs of literals, if
the placement of each pair is controlled by
the same LTORG statement.
X'FO'
Both are stored
CWO'

XL3'O'
Both are stored
HL3'O'
A (*+ 4)

Both are stored
A(*+4)

X'FFFF'
Identical; the first is stored
X'FFFF'
CNOP -- CONDITIONAL NO OPERATION
The CNOP instruction allows the programmer to align an instruction at a specific
half-word boundary.
If any bytes must be
skipped in order to align the instruction
properly, the assembler ensures an unbroken
instruction flow by generating no-operation
instructions.
This facility is useful in
creating calling sequences consisting of a
linkage to a subroutine followed by parameters such as channel command words 

The
END
instruction terminates the
assembly of a program. It may also designate a point in the program or in a
separately assembled program to which control may be transferred after the program
is loaded. The END instruction must always
be the last statement in the source program. A literal may not be used.
If an
external symbol is used in the expression,
the value of the expression must be O.
The format of the END instruction statement is as follows:

r-------T-----------T---------------------,
I Operation

1Operand

I

~-------+-----------+---------------------i
IBlank lEND
IA relocatable ex1
Il _______ I ___________ 1 pression
or blank
_____________________
JI
~

513

r-------T-----------T---------------------,
IName
IOperation lope.rand
I

~-------+-----------+---------------------i
I NAME
ICSECT
I
I
IDS
ISOF
1
IAREA
I BEGIN IBALR
12,0
1
I
IUSING
1*,2
1

I
I
I

END -- END ASSEMBLY

I Name

The operand specifies the point t~ whi~h
control may be transferred when loadl.ng. 1S
complete.
This point is usually the fl.rst
machine-instruction
in the program, as
shown in the following sequence.

~

I .
I .
I .

I
I
I

I
I
I

1L _______ LlEND
BEGIN
___________ 1_____________________
J1
~

NOTE: Editing errors in system macro
definitions (macro definitions included
in a macro library)
are discovered when
the macro definitions are read from the
macro library. This occurs after the END
statement has been read. They will therefore be flagged after the END statement.
If the programmer does not know which of
his system macros caused an error, it is
necessary to punch all system macro definitions used in the program, including
inner macro definitions, and insert them
in the source program as programmer macro
definitions, since programmer macro definitions are flagged in-line. To aid in
debugging it is advisable to test all macro
definitions as programmer macro definitions
before incorporating them in the library as
system macro definitions.

PART II -- THE MACRO LANGUAGE
SECTION

6: INTRODUCTION TO THE MACRO LANGUAGE

SECTION

7: HOW TO PREPARE MACRO DEFINITIONS

SECTION

8: HOW TO WRITE MACRO INSTRUCTIONS

SECTION

9: HOW TO WRITE CONDITIONAL ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

SECTION 10: EXTENDED FEATURES OF THE MACRO LANGUAGE

SECTION 6:

The Operating System/360 macro language
is an extension of the Operating System/360
assembler language.
It provides a convenient way to generate a desired sequence of
assembler language statements many times in
one or more programs. The macro-definition
is written only once, and a single statement, a macro instruction statement, is
written each time a programmer wants to
generate the desired sequence of statements.
This facility simplifies the coding of
programs, reduces the chance of programming
errors, and ensures that standard sequences
of
statements
are used to accomplish
desired functions.
An additional facility,
called conditional assembly, allows one to code statements which mayor may not be assembled,
depending upon conditions evaluated
at
assembly time. These conditions are usually tests of values, which may be defined,
set, changed, and tested during assembly.
The conditional assembly facility may be
used without using macro instruction statements.

INTRODUCTION TO THE MACRO LANGUAGE

THE MACRO DEFINITION
macro definition
is
a
set
of
A
statements that provides the
assemoler
with:
(1) the mnemonic operation code and
the format of the macro instruction, and
(2) the sequence of statements the assembler generates when the macro instruct.ion
appears in the source program.
Every macro definition consists of a
macro definition header statement, a macro
instruction prototype statement, one or
more model statements, COpy statements,
MEXIT,
MNOTE,
or conditional assembly
instructions, and a macro definition trailer statement.
The macro definition header and trailer
statements indicate to the assembler the
beginning and end of a macro definition.
The macro instruction prototype statement specifies the mnemonic operation code
and the type of the macro instruction.
The model statements are used by the
assembler to generate the assembler language statements that replace each occurrence of the macro instruction.
The COpy statements may be used to copy
model statements, MEXIT, MNOTE or conditional assembly instructions from a system
library into a macro definition.

THE MACRO INSTRUCTION STATEMENT
A macro instruction statement (hereafter
called a macro instruction) is a source
program statement. The assembler generates
a sequence of assembler language statements
for each occurrence of the same macro
instruction. The generated statements are
then processed like any other assembler
language statement.
Macro instructions can be tested by
placing them before the assembly cards of a
test program.
Three types of macro instructions may be
written. They are positional, keyword, and
mixed-mode macro instructions.
Positional
macro instructions permit the programmer to
write the operands of a macro instruction
in
a
fixed
order.
Keyword
macro
instructions permit the programmer to write
the operands of a macro instruction in a
variable
order.
Mixed-mode
macro
instructions permit the programmer to use
the features of both positional and keyword
macro instructions in the
same
macro
instruction.

The MEXIT instruction can be used to
terminate processing of a macro definition.
The MNOTE instruction can be used to
generate an error message when the rules
for writing a particular macro instruction
are violated.
The conditional assembly instructions
may be used to vary the sequence of statements generated for each occurrence of a
macro instruction.
Conditional
assembly
instructions may also be used
outside
macro uefinitions, i.e., among the assembler language statements in the program.

THE MACRO LIBRARY
The same macro definition may be made
available to more than one source program
by placing the macro definition in the
macro library.
The macro library is a

Section 6: Introduction to the Macro Language

61

collection of macro definitions that can be
used by all the a ssenibler la rguage programs
in
an
installation.
Once
a macro
definition has been placed in the macro
library it fl1ay be used by writing its
corresponding macro instruction 1n a source
program.
Macro definitions must be in the
systew IT'acro library under the same narr:e as
the prototype.
ThE procedure for placing
macro definitions in the macro library is
described in the utilities publication.

VARYING THE GENERATED STATEN£N'rS
Each time a macro instruction appears in
the source program it is replaced by the
sarre
sequence
of
assembler
language
statements. Conditional assembly instructions, however, may be used to vary the
number and format of the generated statements.

SYSTEM AND PROGRAMMER MACRO DEFINITIONS
,A macro definition included in a source
deck is called a programmer macro definition. One residinq in a macro library is
called a system macro definition. There
is no difference in function.
If a programmer macro is included in a macro
library it becomes a system macro definition, and if a system macro definition is
punched and included in a source deck it
becomes a programmer macro definition.
System and programmer macros will be
expanded the same, but syntax errors are
handled differently. In programmer macros,
error messages are attached to the statements in error. In system macros, however,
error messages cannot be associated with
the statement in error because these macros
are located and edited after the entire
source deck has been read. Therefore, the
error messages are associated wi 1:h the END
statement.

VAlUABLE;

SYfvlBOLS

A
variable symbol is a type of symbol
that is assigned different values by either
the prograrrw.er or the assembler. When the
assemnler uses a macro definition to determine what statements are to replace d
macro instruction, variable symbols in the
model statements are replaced with the
values assigned to them. By changing the
values assigned to variable symbols the
programmer can vary parts of the generated
statements.

A

variable symbol is written as an
followed by from one through
seven letters and/or digits, the first of
which must be a let.ter.
E.lsewhere, two
ampersands must be used to represent an
ampersand.
am~ersand

Because of the difficulty of finding
syntax errors in system macros, a macro
definition should be run and "debugged" as
a programmer macro before it is placed in a
macro library.
SYSTEM MACRO INSTRUCTIONS
The macro instructions that correspond
co macro definitions prepared by IBM -are
called system macro instructions. System
macro instructions are described in OS
Sl~pervisor Services and Macro Instructions,
and OS Data Management Macro Instructions.

62

Types of.

variable~lbols

There are three types of variable symboIs: symbolic pararr'eters, system variable
symbols, and SET symbols. 7he SET symbols
are further hroken down into SETA symbols,
SETB symbols, and SETC symbols. The three
types of variable symbols differ in the way
they are assigned values.

ORGANIZATION OF THIS PAR'I' OF THE
PUBLICATION

Assigning Values to Variable Symbols
SymDolic parameters are assigned values
by the programmer each time he writes a
macro instruction.
System variable symbols are assigned
values by tbe assembler ~ach time it processes a macro instruction.

Sections 7 and 8 describe the Dasie
rules for preparing macro definitions and
for writing macrc instructions.

SET symbols are assigned values by the
programrt:er by means of conditional assembly
instructions.

Section 9 describes the rules for writing conditional assembly instructions.

Global SET Symbols
The values assigned to SE~ syrr.bols in
one macro definition may be used to vary
the statements that appear in other macro
definitions.
All SET symbols used for this
purpose must be defined by the programmer
as global SET symbols.
All other SET
symbols (i.e., those which may be used to
vary statements that appear in the same
macro definition) must be defined by the
programmer as local SET symbols.
Local SET
symbols and the other variable symbols
(that is, symbolic paranleters and system
variable symbols)
are
local
variable
symbols.
Global SF.T symbols are global
variable symbols.

section 10 describes additional features
of the macro language, including rules for
defining global SET symbols, preparing keyword and mixed-mode macro definitions, and
writing keyword and
mixed-~ode
macro
instructions.
Appendix G contains a reference suw.mary
of the entire macro language.
Examples of the features of the language
appear throughout the remainder of the
publication. These examples illustrate the
use of particular features.
HOWEver, they
are not meant to show the full versatility
of these features.

Section 6:

Introduction to the Macro Language

63

SECTION 7:

A macro definition consists of:
1.

A macro definition header statement.

2.

A macro instruction
ment.

3.

4.

HOW TO PRFPARE MACRO DEFINITIONS

definition and must be the last statement
in every macro definition. The format of
this statement is:

prototype state-

r-------T-----------T---------------------,
I Name

I Operation

I Operand

I

~-------+-----------+---------------------~

~ero or more
model statements, COpy
statements,
MEXIT,
MNOTE,
or
conditional assembly instructions.

I A se- I MEND
I quence I
I symbol I

A

tor
Lblank
_______IL___________IL____________________ I

macro definition trailer statement.

I Blank

I
I

\

I
I

~

Except for MEXIT, MNOTE, and conditional
assembly instructions, this section of the
MACRO INSTRUCTION PROTOTYPE
publication describes all of the statements
that may be used to prepare macro definitions.
The macro instruction prototype stateConditional assembly instructions are
ment
(hereafter
called
the prototype
described in Section 9. MEXIT and MNOTE
statement) specifies the mnemonic operation
instructions are described in Section 10.
code
and
the
format
of all macro
instructions
that refer to the macro
Macro definitions appearing in a source
definition.
It must be the second stateprogram must appear before all PUNCH and
ment of every macro definition. The format
REPRO statements and all staT_ements which
of this statement is:
pertain to the first control
section.
Specifically, only the listing
control
instructions
(EJ.ECT,
PRINT, SPACE,
and
r------------T----------T-----------------,
TITLE), OPSYN, ICTL, and ISEQ instructions,
\Name
IOperation \Operand
\
and comments statements can occur before
~------------+----------+-----------------~
the macro definitions. All but the ICTL
\A symbolic \A symbol lOne or more sym- I
and OPSYN instruction can appear between
\parameter
\
Ibolic parameters I
macro definitions if there is more than
lor blank
\
I separated by com-\
IL ____________ \ __________ LImas,
or blank
one definition in the source program.
_________________
J\
Conditional assembly, substitution, and
sequence symbols cannot be used in front of
or between macro definitions.
The symbolic parameters are used in the
macro definition
to represent the name
A macro-definition cannot appear within
field and operands of the corresponding
a macro definition and the maximum number
macro instruction.
A
description
of
of continuation cards for a macro definition
symbolic parameters appears under "Symbolic
statement is two.
Parameters" in this section.
~ACRO -- Iv'1ACRO DEFINITION HEADER
The name field of the prototype statement may be blank,
or it may contain a
The macro definition header statement
symbolic parameter.
indicates the beginning
of
a
macro
definition.
It must be the first statement
The symbol in the operation field is the
in every macro definit.ion. The format of
mnemonic operation code that must appear in
this statement is:
all macro instructions that refer to this
r-------T-----------T---------------------,
macro
definition.
The mnemonic operation
I Name
I Operation I Operand
I
code must not be the Same as the mnemon1C
~-------+-----------+---------------------~
operation code of another macro definition
IBlank
MACRO
I _____________________
Blank
L
_______ I ___________
JI
in the source program or af a machine or
assembler instruction as listed in Appendix
MEND -- MACRO DEFINITION TRAILER
G.
~

~

~

The macro definition trailer statement
indicates the end of a macro definition.
It-can appear only once within a macro

The operand field may contain 0 to 200
symbolic parameters separated by commas.
If there are no symbolic parameters, comments may not appear.
Section 7: How to Prepare Macro Definitions

65

The following is an example of a
prototype statement.

r-------T-----------T---------------------,
I Operation I Operand
I

I Name

~-------t--

I -&NAME
l
- -____

--------t---------------------i

I ___________
lvlOVE
I _____________________
&TO, &FROM
JI

~

~

r--------T-----T------------------------T-'
IName
IOper-IOperand
Comments I I
I

lationl

I NAME 1
I
I

IOP1
IOPERAND1,OPERAND2,OPERANIXI
' I D 3 THIS IS THE NORMAL
IXI
I ' STATEMENT FORMAT
I I

I I

~--------t-----t------------------------t-i

~--------t-----t------------------------t-~

INAME2
I
I

IOP2
I
"

,OPERAND1, THIS IS THE ALIXI
IOPERAND2,OPERAND3 TERNAIXI
TE STATEMENT !o'ORMAT
I I

~--------t-----t------------------------t-~

§'J::9-tement Format

I NAME 3
IOP3
IOPERAND1, THIS IS A COMBIXI
I
I
IOPERAND2,OPERAND3,OPERANIXI
'ID4,OPERAND5 INATION OF IXI
I
BOTH STATEMENT FORMATS
I I
lI ________ I _____ I ________________________
~

The prototype statement may be written
in a format different from that used for
assembler language statements. The normal
format is described in Part I of this publication. The alternate format described
here allows the programmer to write an
operand on each line, and allows the interspersing of operands and comments in the
statement.
In the alternate format,
as in the
normal
format,
the name and operation
fields must appear on the first line of the
statement, and at least one blank must
follow the operation field on that line.
Bo·th types of sta tement formats may be used
in the same prototype statement.

The rules for using the alternate statement format are:
1.

If an operand is followed by a comma
and a blank, and the column after the
end column contains a nonblank character, the operand field may be continued on the next line starting in the
continue column. More than one operand may appear on the same line.

2.

comments may appear after the blank
that indicates the end of an operand,
up t.o and including the end column.

3.

If the next line starts after the
continue
column,
the
information
entered on the next line is considered
comments, and the operand field is
considered terminated. Any subsequent
continuation lines are considered comments.

The following examples illustrate: (1)
the normal statement format, (2) the alternate statement format, and (3) a combination of both statement formats.
66

~

~_J

MODEL STATEMENTS
Model statements are the macro definition
statements from which the desired sequences
of assembler language statements are
generated.
Zero or more model statements
may follow the prototype statement. A
model statement consists of one to four
fields. They are, from left to right, the
name, operation, operand, and comments
fields.
The fields 1ft the model statement must
correspond to the fields in the generated
statement. It is not possible to generate
blanks to separate statement fields.
Model statement fields must follow the
rules for paired apostrophes, ampersands,
and blanks as macro instruction operands
(see "Macro Instruction Operands" in
Section 8).
Though model statements must follow the
normal continuation card conventions,
statements generated from model statements
may have more than two continuation lines.
Substituted statements may not have blanks
in any field except between paired apostrophes. They may not have leading blanks in
the name field.
Name Field
The name field may be blank or it may
contain an ordinary symbol, a variable
symbol, or a sequence symbol.
It may also
contain an ordinary symbol concatenated
with a variable symbol or a variable symbol concatenated with one or more other
variable symbols.
Variable symbols may not appear in the
name field of ACTR, COPY, END, ICTL, ISEQ,
or OPSYN statements. The characters * and
.* may not be substituted for a variable
symbol.
Operation Fleld
The operation field may contain a
machine instruction, an assembler instruc-

tion listed in Section 5 (except END, ICTL,
ISEQ, OPSYN, or PRINT), a macro instruction,
or variable symbol. It may also contain an
ordinary symbol concatenated with a variable
symbol or a variable symbol concatenated
with one or more other variable symbols.

A symbolic parameter consists of an
ampersand followed by from one through
seven letters and/or digits, the first of
which must be a letter. Elsewhere, two
ampersands must be used to represent an
ampersand.

Variable symbols may not be used to
generate

The programmer should
the first four characters
parameter.

•

Macro Instructions

•

Macro prototypes

•

The following instructions:
ACTR
AGO
AIF
ANOP
COpy
CSECT
DSECT
END

GBLA
GBLB
GBLC
ICTL
ISEQ
LCLA
LCLB
LCLC
MACRO
MEND

The
eters:

following are valid symbolic param-

&READER
&A23456
&X4F2

MEXIT
MNOTE
OPSYN
PRINT
REPRO
SETA
SETB
SETC
START

not use &SYS as
of a symbolic

&LOOP2
&N
&$4

The following are invalid
rameters:
CARDAREA
&256B
&AREA2456

symbolic

pa-

(first character is not an
ampersand)
(first character after
ampersand is not a
letter)
(more than seven characters
after the ampersand)
(contains a special character other than initial
ampersand)
(contains a special character, i.e.~ blank, other
than initial ampersand)

variable symbols may also be used outside
of macro definitions to generate mnemonic
operation codes with the preceding
restrictions.

&BCD%34

The use of COpy instructions is de~
scribed under "COpy Statements".
Variable symbols in the line following
a REPRO instruction, will not be replaced
by their v~lues.

Any symbolic paramet~rs in a
model
statement must appear ~n the prototype
statement of the macro 'definition.

&IN AREA

The following is an example of a macro
definition.
Note
that
the
symbolic
parameters in the model statements appear
in the prototype statement.

Operand Field
The operand field may contain ordinary
symbols or variable symbols. However,
variable symbols may not be used in the
operand field of COpy, ICTL, ISEQ, or OPSYN
instructions.
Comments Field
The co~ents field may contain any
combination of characters. No sUbstitution
is performed for variable symbols appearing
in the comments field. Only gener~ed
statements will be p~inted in the listing.
SYMBOLIC PARAMETERS
A symbolic parameter is a type of variable symbol that is assigned values by the
programmer when
he
writes
a
macroinstruction.
The programmer
may
vary
st9tements that are generated for each
occurrence of a macro instruction by varying the values assigned to symbolic parameters.

r-------T-----------T------------,
I Name
I Operation I Operand
I
~-------+-----------+------------~

Header
1
I MACRO
1
I
Prototype I &NAME 1MOVE
I&TO,&FROM
I
Model
1&NAME 1ST
12, SAVE
I
Model
1
IL
12, &FROM
1
Model
liST
12,&TO
1
Model
I
IL
I 2, SAVE
I
Trailer LI ______ I ___________
MEND
I ____________ JI
~

~

Symbolic parameters in model statements
are replaced by the characters of the
macro instruction that correspond to the
symbolic parameters.
In the following example the characters
HERE, FIELDA, and FIELDB of the MOVE macro
instruction
correspond to the symbolic
parameters &NAME, &TO, and &FROM., respectively, of the MOVE prototype statement.

Section 7: How to Prepare Macro' Definitions

67

r------T-----------T---------------------I Name I Operation I Operand
1
.------t-----------+----------------------i
I HERE I MOVE
IFIELDA,FIELDB
I
L-----_L ___________ L ______________________ J

Any occurrence of the symh?lic parame1:ers &NAME,
&TO, and &FROM l.n a model
statement will be replaced by the characters HERE, FIELDA, and FIELDB, respectively. If the preceding macro instruction were
used in a source program, the following
assembler language sta-tements would be generated:

r------T-----------T----------------------,
I Name I Operation IOperand
I

t------+-----------+----------------------i
I HERE 1ST
12,SAVE
I
I 2, FIELDB
I
I
IL
12, FIELDA
I
I
I ST
IL ______ LI ___________
L
I ______________________
2 , SAVE
JI
~

The macro'definition, macro instruction,
and generated statements in the following
example illustrate these rules.

r-----T---------T----------------,I

IName IOperationlOperand
Header

.-----+---------+----------------~

I

I MACRO

Prototypel~NAMEIMOVE

Model
Model
Model
Model
Trailer

I~NAMEIST&TY

I
I
I
I

IL&TY
IST&TY
IL&TY
I MEND

I
I
I&TY,&P,&TO,&FROMI
12,SAVEAREA
I
12,&P&FROM
I
12~&P&TO
I
12,SAVEAREA
I
I
I

t-----+---------+----------------i
IHERE IMOVE
ID,FIELD,A,B
I
.-----+---------+----------------i
GeneratedlHERE ISTD
12, SAVE AREA
I
Macro

Generated I
Generatedl

ILD
12,FIELDB
I
ISTD
12,FIELDA
I
Generate~1L _____ ILD
_________ L12,SAVEAREA
________________ JI
~

The example below illustrates another
use of the MOVE macro instruction using
operands
different
from those in the
preceding example.

r-------T-----------T------------,
1Name
1Operation I Operand
I

Macro

.-------+-----------+------------i
I LABEL I MOVE
IIN,OUT
1

.-------+-----------+------------i

Generated I LABEL 1ST
12,SAVE
I
Generated I
IL
12,OUT
I
Generated I
1ST
12, IN
I
GeneratedlL _______ LIL
___________ L12,SAVE
____________ JI

If a symbolic parameter appears in the
comments field of a model stat.ement, it is
not replaced by the corresponding characters of the macro instruction.

Symbolic Parameters with
O·ther Characters or· Other Symbol ic

~?ncatenating
R..~rameters

If a symbolic parameter. in a model
statement is immediately preceded or followed by other characters or another symbolic parameter, the characters that correspond to the symbolic parameter are combined in the generated statement with the
other characters or the characters that
co:respond to. the other symbolic parameter.
ThlS process 1.8 called concatenation.

68

The symbolic parameter &TY is used in
each of the four model statements to vary
the mnemonic operation code of each of the
generated statements. The character D in
the macro instruction corresponds to symbolic parameter &TY. Since &TY is preceded
by other characters 
.AREA2456 (more than seven characters
after period)
.BCD%84
(contains a special character
other than initial period)
.IN AREA (contains a special
character, i.e., blank,
other than initial period)

If a sequence symbol appears in the name
field of a macro-instruction, and the corresponding prototype st.atement contains a
symbolic parameter in the name field,
the
sequence symbol does not replace the symbolic parameter wherever it is used in the
macro-definition.

The
rule.

following

example illustrates this

r-------T-----------T-------------------,
IName

IOperation

I

I Operand

~-------+-----------+-------------------~

I
I MACRO
1&NAME I MOVE
2 1&NAIviE 1ST
IlL
l i ST
I
IL
I
1MEND

I
1 &TO, &FROM
12, SAVEAREA
12, &FROM
12 ,&TO
12,SAVEAREA
I

1
1
1
1
I
1
1

3 I.SYM

IFIELDA,FIELDB

I

1

All LCLA, LCLB, or LCLC instructions in
a macro definition must appear immediately
after the prototype statement and GBLA,
GBLB or GBLC instructions. All LCLA, LCLB,
or LCLC instructions outside macro
definitions must appear after all macro
definitions in the source program, after
all GBLA, GBLB, and GBLC instructions
outside macro definitions, before all
conditional assembly instructions, and
PUNCH and REPRO statements outside macro
definitions, and before the first control section of the program.

~-------+-----------+-------------------~

I MOVE

~-------+-----------+-------------------~

4 liST
12,SAVEAREA
I
IlL
12 , FIELDB
I
I
1ST
12, FIELDA
I
1l _______ LI
L lL ___________________
2 , S AVEAREA
___________
J1

The symbolic parameter &NAME is used in
the name field of the prototype statement
(statement 1) and the first model statement
(statement 2).
In the macro-instruction
(statement 3) a sequence symbol
(.SYM)
corresponds
to
the symbolic parameter
&NAME.
&NAME is not replaced by .SYM, and,
therefore,
the
generated
statement
(statement 4) does not contain an entry in
the name field.

SETA -- SET ARITHMETIC
The SETA instruction may be us~d to
assign an arithmetic value to a SETA symbol. The format of this instruction is:

r--------T-----------T--------------------,
I Name

IOperation

IOperand

1

~--------+-----------+--------------------~

IA SETA ISETA
IAn arithmetic
I
Il ________
symbol L1___________ LI ____________________
expression
J1

The expression in the operand field is
evaluated as a Signed 32-bit arithmetic
value which is assigned to the SETA symbol
in the name field.
The minimum and maximum
allowable values of the expression are -2 31
and +2 31 -1, respectively.

LCLA, LCLB, LCLC -- DEFINE LOCAL SET SYMBOLS
The format of these instructions is:

r-------T-----------T---------------------,

1Name

1Operation

I Operand

1

~-------+-----------+---------------------~

IBlank
I

1LCLA,
lOne or more variable 1
1symbols, that are
I
I LCLB, or
I
ILCLC
Ito be used as SET
I
I
I
1symbols, separated
1
commas
Il _______ LI ___________ LIby
_____________________
JI

The LCLA, LCLB, and LCLC instructions
are used to define and assign initial
values to SETA,
SETB, and SETC symbols,
respectively.
The SETA, SETB, and SETC
symbols are assigned the initial values of
0, 0, and null character value, respectively.
The programmer should not define any SET
symbol whose first four characters are
&SYS.

Section 9:

The expression may consist of one term
or an arithmetic combination of terms. The
terms that may be used alone or in combination with each other are self-defining
terms, variable symbols, and the length,
scaling, integer, count, and number attributes. Self-defining terms are described
in Part I of this publication.
Note: A SETC variable symbol may appear in
a SETA expression only if the value of the
SETC variable is one to eight decimal
digits.
The decimal digits will be converte~ to a positive arithmetic value.
The arithmetic operators that may be
used to combine the terms of an exp"ression
are
+ (addition),
- (subtraction),
* (multiplication), and / (division).
An expression may not contain two terms
or two operators in succession, nor may it
begin with an operator.
The following are valid operand fieldS
of SETA instructions:

How to Write Conditional Assembly Instructions

81

&AREA+X' 2D'
&BETA*10
L'&HERE+32

I'&N/25
&E,XIT-S' &ENTRY+l
29

The following are invalid operand fields
of SETA instructions:

&AREAX'C'
&FIELD+-&DELTA*2
*+32
NAME/15

~yaluation

(two terms in succession)
(two operators in succession)
(begins with an operator)
(begins with an operator;
two operators in succession)
(NAME is not a valid term)

of Arithmetic EXQressions

The
procedure used to evaluate the
arithmetic expression in the operand field
of a SETA instruction is the same as that
used to evaluate arithmetic expressions in
assembler language statements.
The only
difference between the two types of arithmetic expressions is the terms that are
allowed in each expression.
The

following

evaluation

The arithmetic value assigned to a SETA
symbol is substituted for the SETA symbol
when it is used in an arithmetic expression.
If the SETA symbol is not used in an
arithmetic expression, the arithmetic value
is converted to an unsigned integer, with
leading zeros removed.
If the value is
zero, it is converted to a single zero.
The following example
rule:

term
Each
value.

is

given

its

numerical

2.

The arithmetic operations are performed moving from left to right.
However, multiplication and/or division are performed before addition and
subtraction.
value
The computed result is the
assigned to the SETA symbol in the
name field.

~-------+-----------+-------------------i

MACRO
MOVE
LCLA
SETA
SETA
SETA
SETA
ST

&NAME

4

&A
&B
&C
&D
&NAME

5
6

&TO,&FROM
&A,&B,,&C,&D
10
12
&A-&B
&A+&C
2,SAVEAREA
2,&FROM&C
2., &TO&D
2 6 SAVEAREA

L

ST
L

MEND
~-------+-----------+-------------------i

I HERE

1MOVE

IFIELDA,FIELDB

,

~-------+-----------+-------------------i

'HERE
1ST
12,SAVEAREA
,
12nFIELDB2
,
I
IL
,
1ST
12, FIELDA8
,
I
lL
SAVEAREA
L _______
___________ 12"
___________________
JI
~

The arithmetic expression in the operand
field of a SETA instruction may contain one
or more sequences of arithmetically combined terms that are enclosed in parentheses. A sequence of parenthesized terms may
appear
within
another
parenthesized
sequence.
Only five levels of parentheses
are allowed and an expression may not
consist of more than 16 terms. Parentheses
required for sublist notation, substring
notation,
and subscript notation count
toward this limit.

this

r-------T-----------T-------------------,
I Operation 1Operand
I

1
2
3

1.

illustrates

I Name

procedure is

u~:;ed:

3.

The parenthesized portion or portions of
an arithmetic expression are
evaluated
before the rest of the terms in the expression are evaluated.
If a sequence of
parenthesized terms appears within another
parenthesized
sequence,
the
innermost
sequence is evaluated first.

~

The
following are examples of SETA
instruction operand fields that contain
parenthesized sequences of terms.

Statements 1 and 2 assign to the SETA
symbols &A and &B the arithmetic values +10
and +12, respectively.
Therefore, statement 3 assigns the SETA symbol &C the
arithmetic value -2. When &C is used in
statement 5, the arithmetic value -2 is
converted to the unsigned integer 2.
When
&C is used in statement 4, however w the
arithmetic value -2 is used. Therefore, &D
is assigned the arithmetic value +8.
When
&D is used in statement 6, the arithmetic
value +8 is converted to the unsigned
integer 8.

(I,'&HERE+32)*29
&AREA+X'2D'/(&EXIT-S'&ENTRY+l)
&BETA*10*(I'&N/2S/(&EXIT-S'&ENTRY+l»

The following example shows how the
value assigned to a SETA symbol may be
changed in a macro definition.

82

r-------T-----------T-------------------,
I Operation I Operand
,

&NUMBER is the first symbolic parameter
in the operand field of the prototype
statement (statement 1). The corresponding
characters,
(A~B,C,D,E),
of the
macroinstruction (statement 4) are a sublist.
Statement 2 assigns to &LAST the arithmetic
value +5, which is equal to the number of
operands in the sublist.
Therefore, in
statement 3, &NUMBER(&LAST) is replaced by
the fifth operand of the sublist.

I Name

~-------+-----------+-------------------~

1

2
3
4

I
I MACRO
I &NAME I MOVE
I
I LCLA
I&A
I SETA
I&NAME 1ST
I
IL
I&A
I SETA
liST
I
IL
I
I MEND

I
I &TO, &FROM
I &A
15
12 g SAVEAREA
12 ,&FROM&A
18
12,&TO&A
12., SAVEAREA
I

I
I
I
I
I

I

I
I
I
I

SETC -- SET CHARACTER

~-------+-----------+-------------------i

I HERE

I MOVE

IFIELDA,FIELDB

The SETC instruction is used to assign a
character value to a SETC symbol. The
format of this instruction is:

I

~-------+-----------+-------------------i

I HERE
I
I

1ST
12 ,SAVEAREA
I
IL
12, FIELDB5
I
I ST
I 2" FIELDA8
I
IL_______ I ___________
L
12,
SAVEAREA
___________________
JI
~

r---------T-----------T-------------------,
I Name
I Operation I Operand
I

~

~---------+-----------+-------------------~

Statement 1 assigns the arithmetic value
+5 to SETA symbol &A.
In statement 2, &A
is converted to the unsigned integer 5.
Statement 3 assigns the arithmetic value +8
to tA.
In statement 4, therefore, &A is
converted
to
the unsigned integer 8,
instead of 5.
A SETA symbol may be used with a symbolic parameter to refer to an operand in an
operand sublist.
If a SETA symbol is used
for this purpose it must have been assigned
a positive value.
Any expression that may bE used in the
operand field of a SETA instruction may be
used to refer to an operand in an operand
sublist"
Sublists are described
under "Operand Sublists."

in

Section

8

The following macro definition may be
used to add the last operand in an operand
sublist to the first operand in an operand
sublist and store the result at the first
operand. A sample macro-instruction and
generated statements follow the
macro
definition.

r------T-----------T--------------------,
I Name I Operation I Operand
I
~------+-----------+--------------------i

I

I MACRO
I
1 1
IADDX
I&NUMBER,®
I
I LCLA
I &LAST
2 I&LAST ISETA
IN'&NUMBER
1
I L l ®, &NUMBER(l)
3 I
IA
I ®, &NUMBER (&LAST)
I ST
I ®, &NUMBER(l)
1
I
I MEND
I

I

1

1

I
I
1

I
I

~------+-----------+--------------------i

4 I

IADDX

I (A,B,C,D,E),3

I

~------+-----------+--------------------i

IlL
I3,A
I
1
IA
1 3 ,E
I
3 ,A
1L ______ 1ST
___________ 1 ____________________
JI
~

~

Section 9:

IA SETC
I symbol

ISETC
lOne operand, of
I
I
Ithe form described 1
1
L _________ I ___________ I bE~low
___________________ JI
~

~

The operand field may consist of the
type attribute, a character expression, a
substring notation, or a concatenation of
substring
notations
and
character
expressions.
A SETA symbol may appear in
the operand of a SETC statement.
The
result is the character representation of
the decimal value, unsigned, with leading
zeros removed.
If the value is zero, one
decimal zero is used.
Type Attribute
The character value assigned to a SETC
symbol may be a type attribute. If the
type attribute is used, it must appear
alone in the operand field. The following
example assigns to the SETC symbol &TYPE
the letter that is the type attribute of
the macro instruction operand that corresponds to the symbolic parameter &ABC.

r-------T-----------T---------------------,

IName
I Operation 1operand
1
~-------+-----------+---------------------i
I&TYPE
L
_______ ISETC
___________ IT'&ABC
_____________________ JI
~

~

Character Expression
A character expression consists of any
combination
of (up to 255) characters
enclosed in apostrophes.
The first eight characters in a character value enclosed in apostrophes in the
operand field are assigned to the SETC
symbol in the name field. The maximum size
character value that can be assigned to a
SETC symbol is eight characters.
Evaluation of Character Expressions:
The
following statement assigns the character
value AB%4 to the SETC symbol &ALPHA:

How to Write Conditional Assembly Instructions

83

r--------T-----------T--------------------,
I Name

I Operation

I Operand

I

~--------+-----------+--------------------i

IL________
r:ALPHA LI ___________
SETC
AB%4'
LI ____________________
JI

The
following statement
character value HALF&& to the
&AND.

assigns the
SETC symbol

I

More than one character expression may
be concatenated into a single character
expression by placing a period between the
t€~rrninating
apostrophe of one character
expression and the opening apostrophe of
the next character expression. For example, either of the following statements may
be used to assign the character value
ABCDEF to the SETC symbol &BETA.

r-------T-----------T---------------------,
I Name

I Operation

I Name

I Operation

I Operand

I

~-------+-----------+---------------------i

I&BETA

ISETC

I'ABCDEF '

I

I&BETA
L
_______ LISETC
___________ LI'ABC'.'DEF'
_____________________ JI

Two apostrophes must be used to represent an apostrophe that is part of a
character expression.
The following statement assigns
the
character value L'SYMBOL to the SETC symbol
&LENG'llH.
r---------T----~------T-------------------,

I Name

I Operation

I Operand

I

~---------+-----------+-------------------i

I&LENGTH
L_________ LISETC
___________ LI'L"SYMBOL'
___________________ JI

Variable symbols may be concatenated
with other characters in the operand field
of a SETC instruction according to the
general rules for concatenating symbolic
parameters with other characters (see Section 1).

I

I&AND
l _______ LISETC
___________ LI'HALF&&'
_____________________ JI

§u~string

r-------T-----------T---------------------,

I Operand

.-------+-----------+---------------------i

Notation

The character value assigned to a SETC
symbol may be a substring character value.
Substring character values permit the programmer to assign part of a character value
to a SETC symbol.
If the programmer wants to assign part
of a character value to a SETC symbol, he
must indicate to the assembler in the
operand field of a SETC instruction: (1)
the character value itself, and (2) the
part of the character value he wants to
assign to the SETC symbol. The combination
of (1) and (2) in the operand field of a
SETC instruction is called a substring
notation.
The character value that is
assigned to the SETC symbol in the name
field
is called a substring character
value.
Substring notation consists of a character expression, immediately followed by two
arithmetic expressions that are separated
from each other by a comma and are enclosed
lin parentheses. Each arithmetic expression
may be any expression that is allowed in
the operand field of a SETA instruction.

IL________
&GAMMA_
SETC
I &ALPHA.RS,]~'
LI ___________
LI ____________________
JI

The first expression indicates the first
character in the character expression that
is to be assigned to the SETC symbol in the
name field. The second expression indicates the number of consecutive characters
in the character expression (starting with
the character indicated by
the
first
expression) that are to be assigned to the
SETC symbol. If a substring asks fur more
characters than are in the character string
only the characters in the string will be
aSSigned.

Two ampersands must be used to represent
an ampersand that is not part of a variable
symbol. Both ampersands become part of the
character value aSSigned to the SETC symbol.
They are not replaced by a single
ampersand.

The maximum size substring character
value that can be assigned to a SETC symbol
is eight characters.
The maximum size
character expression the substring character value can be chosen from is 255 characters.
If a value greater than 8 is specified, the leftmost 8 characters will be
used.

If &ALPHA has been assigned the character value AB%4, the following statement may
be used to assign the character value
AB%4RST to the variable symbol &GA¥MA.

r--------T-----------T--------------------,
I Name

I Operation

I Operand

I

~--------+-----------+--------------------i

84

The
tions:

~---------+-----------+-----------------~

'&ALPHA' (2,5)
'AB%4'(&AREA+2,1)
, &ALPHA. RST' (6, &A)
'ABC&GAM~A' (&A,&AREA+2)
The
following
notations:
• &BET A'

r---------T-----------T-----------------,
IName
I Operation I Operand
I

following are valid substring nota-

are

1
invalid

substring

2
3

4

(4, 6)

(blanks between character value
and arithmetic expressions)
IL"SYMBOL' (142-&XYZ)
(only one arithmetic expression)
'AB%4&ALPHA' (8 &FIELD*2)
(arithmetic expressions
not separated by a comma)
'BETA'4,6
(arithmetic expressions
not enclosed in parentheses)

I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I

I

1

I MOVE

IA,B

I

statement 1 assigns the character value
FIELD to the SETC symbol &PREFIX. Therefore,
&PREFIX is replaced by FIELD in
statement 2. Statement 3 assigns the character value AREA to &PREFIX. Therefore,
&PREFIX is replaced by AREA, instead of
FIELD, in statement 4.

~---------+-----------+-----------------~

1
I&TO,&FROM
I&PREFIX
I 'FIELD'
12,SAVEAREA
12, &PREFIX&FROM
12, &PREFIX&TO
I 2, SJI.VEAREA
1

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1

The following example illustrates the
use of a substring notation as the operand
field of a SETC instruction.

r---------T-----------T-----------------,
I Operation I Operand
I

IName

~---------+-----------+-----------------~

I
I &NAME
1
1 I&PREFIX
I&NAME
2 I
I
I

I MACRO
I MOVE
I LCLC
ISETC
1ST
IL
I ST
IL

1
I&TO,&FROM
I&PREFIX
II&TO' (1,5)
12,SAVEAREA
12, &PREFIX&FROM
I 2 , &TO
12,SAVEAREA

I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I

I

I MEND

I

I

I HERE

I MOVE

I FIELDA, B

I

~---------+-----------+-----------------~

~---------+-----------+-----------------~

I HERE
1ST
12, SAVEAREA
I
IlL
I 2, FIELDB
I
I
1ST
12, FIELDA
I
I _________ 4IL
L
___________ 412,SAVEAREA
_________________ JI

I

~---------+-----------+-----------------~

I A, B

I
I&TO,&FROM
I&PREFIX
I I FIELD'
12,SAVEAREA
12, &PREFIX&FROM
I 'AREA'
12,&PREFIX&TO
12,SAVEAREA
1

I HERE;
1ST
12, SAVEAREA
I
IlL
I 2, FIELDS
1
I
I ST
I 2 , AREAA
I
IL_________ 4IL
___________ 412,SAVEAREA
_________________ JI

r---------T-----------T-----------------,
I Name
I Operation I Operand
I

I MOVE

INEND

I HERE

For example, consider the
following
macro-definition, macro instruction,
and
generated statements.

I HERE

I

I MOVE
I
I LCLC
I &PREFIX I SETC
I&NA~ffi
1ST
1
IL
I&PREFIX ISETC
liST
I
IL

~---------+-----------+-----------------~

The character value assigned to a SETC
symbol is substituted for the SETC symbol
when it is used in the name, operation, or
operand field of a statement.

I MACRO
I MOVE
I LCLC
ISETC
1ST
IL
1ST
IL
1MEND

I MACRO

~---------+-----------+-----------------~

Using SETC Symbols

I
I &NAME
I
1 I&PREFIX
I&NAME
2 I
3 I
I
1

/
I &NAME

I

~---------+-----------+-----------------~

I HERE

I ST
12, SAVEAREA
I
I
IL
12,FIELDB
I
I
1ST
/2,FIELDA
1
IL_________ 4I ___________
L
SAVEAREA
412,
_________________
JI

Statement 1 assigns the substring character value FIELD (the first five characters corresponding to symbolic parameter
&TO) to the SETC symbol &PREFIX. Therefore, FIELD replaces &PREFIX in statement
2.

Statement 1 assigns the character value
FIELD to the SETC symbol &PREFIX.
In
statements 2 and 3, &PREFIX is replaced by
FIELD.
The following example shows how the
value assigned to a SETC symbol may be
changed in a macro definition.
Section 9:

Note: An operand of a SETC symbol cannot be
passed as a sublist to a macro instruction.
Concatentating
Substring
Notations and
Character Expressions: Substring notations
may be concatenated with character expressions in the operand field of a SETC

How to Write Conditional Assembly Instructions

85

instruction. If a substring no"tation follows a character expression, the two may be
concatenated by placing a period between
t.he terminating apostrophe of the character
E~xpression and the
opening apostrophe of
the substring notation.
For example" if &ALPHA has been assigned
the character value AB%4, and &BETA has
been assigned the character value ABCDEF,
1:hen the following statement assigns &GAMMA
the character value AB%4BCD.

r--------T---------T----------------------,
I Name
I Operation IOperand
I
~--------+---------+----------------------i

IA SETB

ISETB

IA 0 or a 1 enclosed orl

I symbol I
Inot enclosed in paren-I
I
I
Itheses, or a logical I
I
I
lexpression enclosed
I
Il ________ I_________ lin
parentheses
______________________
JI
~

~

ISETC
(2,3)1J
__________ I'&ALPHA·.'~BETA'
_____________________

The operand field may contain a 0 or a 1
or a logical expression enclosed in parentheses. A logical expression is evaluated
to determine if it is true or false; the
SETB symbol in the name field is then
aSSigned the binary value 1 or 0 corresponding to true or false, respectively.

If a substring notation precedes a character expression or another substring notation, the two may be concatenated by writing the opening apostrophe of the second
item immediately after the closing parenthesis of the substring notation.

A logical expression consists of one
term or a logical combination of terms.
The terms that may be used alone or in
combination with each other are arithmetic
relations, character relations, and SETB
symbols.
The logical operators used to
combine the terms of an expression are AND,
OR, and NOT.

r--------T----------T---------------------,
IOperation IOperand
I

I Name

~--------+----------+---------------------i

I&GAMMA

L ________

~

~

The programmer may optionally place a
period between the closing parenthesis of a
substring notation and the opening apostrophe of the next item in the operand
field.
If &ALPHA has been assigned the character value AB%4, and &ABC has been assigned
the character value 5RS, either of the
following statements may be used to assign
&WORD the character value AB%45RS.

r------T---------T------------------------,
I Operation IOperand
I

I Name

~------+---------+------------------------i

I &WORD I SETC
I' &ALPHA' (1,4) "&ABC'
I
I ______
&WORD I SETC
&ALPHA' (1,4) II &ABC' (1,3) JI
L
_________ I'
________________________
~

~

If a SETC symbol is used in the operand
field of a SETA instruction, the charact,er
value aSSigned to the SETC symbol must be
one to eight decimal digits.
If a SETA symbol is used in the operand
field of a SETC statement, the arithmetic
value is converted to an unsigned integer
~Ti th
leading zeros removed. If the value
is zero, it is converted to a single zero.

~;ETB

-- SET BINARY

The SETB instruction may be used to
assign the binary value 0 or 1 to a SETB
symbol. The format of this instruction is:
86

An expre~sion may not contain two terms
in succeSSlon.
A logical expression may
contain two operators in succession only if
the first operator is either AND or OR and
the second operator is NOT.
A logical
expression may begin with the operator NOT.
It may not begin with the operators AND or
OR.
An arithmetic relation consists of two
arithmetic expressions connected by a relational operator. A character relation consists of two character values connected by
a relational operator.
The
relational
operators are EQ (equal), NE (not equal),
LT (less than), GT (greater than)" LE (less
than or equal), and GE (greater than or
equal) •
Any expression that may be used in the
operand field of a SETA instruction, may be
used as an arithmetic expression in the
operand field of a SETB instruction. Anything that may be used in the operand field
of a SETC instruction may be used as a
character value in the operand field of a
SETB instruction. This includes substring
and type attribute notations. The maximum
size of the character values that can be
compared is 255 characters.
If the two
character values are of unequal size, then
the smaller one will always compare less
than the larger one.
The relational and logical operators
must be immediately preceded and followed
by at least one blank or other special
character. Each relation mayor may not be
enclosed in parentheses. If a relation is
not enclosed in parentheses, it must be

separated from the logical operators by at
least one blank or other special character.

(NOT (&B AND &AREA+X'2D' GT 29»
(&B AND (T'&P12 EQ 'F' OR &B})

The following are valid operand fields
of SETB instructions:

The parenthesized portion or portions of
a logical expression are evaluated before
the rest of the terms in the expression are
evaluated.
If a sequence of parenthesized
terms appears within another parenthesized
sequence, the innermost sequence is evaluated first.
Five levels of parentheses are
permissible.

1

(&AREA+2 GT 29)
('AB%4' EQ '&ALPHA')
(T'&ABC NE T'&XYZ)
( T' &P12 EQ 'F')
(&AREA+2 GT 29 OR &B)
(NOT &B AND &AREA+X'2D' GT 29)
( , &C' EQ' MB' )

Using SETB Symbols

(0)

The following are invalid operand fields
of SETB instructions:
&B

(not enclosed in parentheses)

(T'&P12 EQ 'F' &B)
(two terms in succession)
('AB%4' EQ 'ALPHA' NOT &B)
(the NOT operator must be
preceded by AND or OR)
(AND T' &P12 EQ 'F')
(expression begins with AND)

The logical value assigned to a SETB
symbol is used for the SETB symbol appearlng ln the operand field of an AIF instruction or another SETB instruction.
If a SETB symbol is used in the operand
field of a SETA instruction, or in arithmetic relations in the operand fields of
AIF and SETB instructions, the
binary
values 1 (true) and 0 (false) are converted
to the arithmetic values +1 and +0, respectively.
If a SETB symbol is used in the operand
field of a SETC instruction, in character
relations in the operand fields of AIF and
SETB instructions, or in any other statement, the binary values 1 (true) and 0
(false), are converted to the character
values 1 and 0, respectively.

Evaluation of Logical Expressions
The
following procedure is used to
evaluate a logical expresslon in the operand field of a SETB instruction:
1.

2.

3.

The following example illustrates these
rules. It is assumed that L'&TO EQ 4 is
true, and S'&TO EQ 0 is false.

r-------T-----------T-------------------,
I Operation I Operand
I

I Name

Each term (i.e., arithmetic relation,
character relation, or SETB symbol) is
evaluated and given its logical value
(true or false).
The logical operations are performed
moving from left to right.
However,
NOTs are performed before ANDs, and
ANDs are performed before ORs.
The
computed result is the value
assigned to the SETB symbol in the
name field.

The logical expression in the operand
field of a SETB instruction may contain one
or more sequences of logically combined
terms that are enclosed in parentheses. A
sequence of parenthesized terms may appear
within another parenthesized sequence.
The following are examples of
SETB
instruction operand fields that contain
parenthesized sequences of terms.
Section 9:

~-------+-----------+-------------------~

&NAME

1
2
3
4

&Bl
&B2
&Al
&Cl

lVJACRO
MOVE
LCLA
LCLB
LCLC
SETB
SETB
SETA
SETC
ST
L
ST
L
MEND

&TO,&FROM
&Al
&Bl,&B2
&Cl
(L'&TO EQ 4)
(S'&TO EQ O)
&Bl
'&B2'
2, SAVE AREA
2,&FROM&Al
2*&TO&C1
2*SAVEAREA

~-------+-----------+-------------------~

I HERE

I MOVE

IFIELDA,FIELDB

I

~-------+-----------+-------------------~

I HERE
I

1ST

IL

12.,SAVEAREA

I 2, FIELDBl

I

I
liST
12,FIELDAO
I
IL _______ i I ___________
L
SAVEAREA
i 12.,
___________________
JI

How to Write Conditional Assembly Instructions

87

Because the operand field of statement 1
is true, &B1 is assigned the binary value
1. Therefore, the arithmetic value +1 is
substituted for &B1
in
statement
3.
Because the operand field of sta-tement 2 is
false,
&B2 is assigned the binary value O.
Therefore, the character value 0 is substituted for &B2 in statement 4.

AlF -- CONDITIONAL BRANCH
The AlF instruction is used to conditionally alter the sequence in which source
program statements
or
macro~definition
statements are processed by the assembler.
The assembler assigns a maximum count of
4096 AIF and AGO branches that may be
executed in the source progran. or in a
macro-definition.
When a macro-definition
calls an inner macro-definition, the current value of the count is saved and a new
count of 4096 is set up for the inner
macro-definition.
When processing in the
inner definition is completed and a return
is made to the higher definitionJ the saved
count is restored.
The format of this
instruction is:

r---------T---------T---------------------,
I Name
I Operation I Operand
I
.---------+---------+---------------------i
IA seIAIF
IA logical expression I
Iquence
I
lenclosed in parenI
Isymbol orl
Itheses, immediately I
I
I followed by a
I
I blank
symbol
lI _________ I _________ Isequence
_____________________
JI
~

~

Any logical expression that may be used
in the operand field of a SETB instruction
may be used in the operand field of an AIF
instruction.
The sequence symbol in the
operand field must immediately follow the
closing parenthesis of the logical expression.
The logical expression in the operand
field is evaluated to determine if it is
true or false. If the expression is true,
the statement named by the sequence symbol
in the operand field is the next statement
processed by the assembler.
If the expression is false, the next sequential statement is processed by the assembler.
The sta-tement named
symbol may precede or
instruction.

by the sequence
follow the
AIF

If an AIF instruction is in a macrodefinition, then the sequence symbol in the
operand field must appear in the name field
of a statement in the definition.
If an
88

AlF instruction appears outside
macrodefinitions, then the sequence symbol in
the operand field must appear in the name
field of a
statement
outside
macrodefinitions.
The following are valid operand fields
of AIF instructions:
(&AREA+X'2D' GT 29) . READER
(T'&PI2 EQ 'F') . THERE
('&FlELD3' EQ' '}.N03
The following are invalid operand fields
of AIF instructions:
(no sequence symbol)
(T'&ABC NE T'&XYZ)
(no logical expression)
.X4F2
(T'&ABC NE T'&XYZ) .X4F2
(blanks between logical
expression and sequence symbol)
The following macro-definition may be
used to generate the statements needed to
move a full-~lord fixed-point number from
one
storage
area
to
another.
The
statements will be generated only if the
type attribute of both storage areas is the
letter F.

r-----T---------T----------------------,
IName IOperationlOperand
I
.-----+---------+----------------------~

I
I&N
1 I
2 I
3 I&N

IMACRO
I MOVE
IAIF
IAIF
1ST

I
I
I&T,&F
I
I (T' &T NE T' &F) .END
I
I(T'&T NE 'F').END
I
12,SAVEAREA
I
I
IL
12, &F
I
l i ST
12,&T
I
I
IL
I 2, SAVEAREA
I
4 LI.END
_____ IMEND
_________ I ______________________ JI
~

~

The logical expression in the operand
field of statement 1 has the value true if
the type attributes of the two macroinstruction operands are not equal. If the
type attributes are equal, the expression
has the logical value false.
Therefore, if the type attributes are
not equal, statement 4 (the statement named
by the sequence symbol .END) is the next
statement processed by the assembler.
If
the type attributes are equal, statement 2
(the
next
sequential
statement)
is
processed.
The logical expression in the operand
field of statement 2 has the value true if
the type attribute of the first macroinstruction operand is not the letter F.
If the type attribute is the letter F, the
expression has the logical value false.

Therefore, if the type attribute is not
the letter F, statement 4 (the statement
named by the sequence symbol .END) is the
next statement processed by the assembler.
If the type attribute is the letter F,
statement 3 (the next sequential statement)
is processed.

The
AGO
instruction
is
used
to
unconditionally alter the sequence in which
source program or macro-definition statements are processed by the assembler.
The
assembler assigns a maximum count of 4096
AIF and AGO branches that may be executed
in the source program or in a macrodefinition. When a macro-definition calls
an inner macro-definition, the
current
value of the count is saved and a new count
of 4096 is set up for the inner macrodefinition. When processing in the inner
definition is completed and a return is
made to the higher definition, the saved
count is restored.
The format of this
instructicn is:

r----------T---------T--------------------,
I Operation I Operand
I

I Name

~----------+---------+--------------------~

~

~

~------+---------+----------------------~
1

2
3

4

AGO -- UNCONDITIONAL BRANCH

IA sequencelAGO
Isymbol or I
blank
I ____
lI __________

r------T---------T----------------------,
IName I Operation I Operand
I

IA sequence symbol
I
I
I
____ I ____________________ JI

I
I MACRO
I
I
I &NAME IHOVE
I &T, &F
I
I
I AIF
I (T' &T EQ 'F'). FIRST
I
I
I AGO
I . END
I
I.FIRSTIAIF
I(T'&T NE T'&F).END
I
I&NAME 1ST
12,SAVEAREA
I
I
IL
12,&F
I
I
1ST
12, &T
I
I
IL
12,SAVEAREA
I
MEND
I ______________________ JI
lI.END
______ I _________
~

~

Statement 1 is used to determine if the
type attribute
of
the
first
macroinstruction operand is the letter F. If
the
type
attribute is the letter F,
statement 3 is the next statement processed
by the assembler.
If the type attribute is
not the letter F, statement 2 is the next
statement processed by the assembler.
Statement 2 is used to indicate to the
assembler that the next statement to be
processed is statement 4 (the statement
named by sequence symbol .END).
ACTR -- CONDITIONAL ASSEMBLY LOOP COUNTER
The ACTR instruction is used to assign a
maximum count (different from the standard
count of 4096) to the number of AGO and AIF
branches executed within a macro-definition
or within the source program. The format
of this instruction is as follows:

~

r-------------T---------T-----------------,
IOperationlOperand
I

IName

~-------------+---------+-----------------~

IBlank

The statement named by the sequence
symbol in the operand field is the next
statement processed by the assembler.
The s.tatement named
symbol may precede or
instruction.

by the sequence
follow the
AGO

If an AGO instruction is part of a
macro-definition, then the sequence symbol
in the operand field must appear in the
name field of a statement that is in that
definition.
If an AGO instruction appears
outside
macro-definitions,
then
the
sequence symbol in the operand field must
appear 1n the name field of a statement
outside macro-definitions.
The following example illustrates the
use of the AGO instruction.
Section 9:

lI_____________

IACTR
IAny valid SETA
I
expression
I _________ I _________________
JI

~

~

This statement, which can only occur
immediately after the global and local
declarations, causes a counter to be set to
the value in the operand field. The counter is checked for zero or a negative
value: if it is not zero or negative, it is
decremented by one each time an AGO or AIF
branch is executed.
If the count is zero
before decrementing, the assembler will
take one of two actions:
1.

If processing is
being
performed
inside a macro definition, the entire
nest of macro definitions will be
terminated and the next source statement will be processed.

2.

If the source program is being processed, an END card will be generated.

How to Write Conditional Assembly Instructions

89

An
ACTR
instruction
in
a macrodefinition affects only that definition; it
has no effect on the number of AIF and AGO
branches that way be executed in macrodefinitions called.
ANOP -- ASSEMBLY NO OPERATION
The
ANOP
instruction
facilitates
conditional and unconditional branching to
statements named by symbols or variable
symbols.

Statement 1 is used to determine if the
type attribute
of
the
first
macroinstruction operand is the letter F.
If
the type attribute is not the letter F,
statement 2 is the next statement processed
by the assembler.
If the type attribute is
the letter F, statement 4
should
be
processed next.
However, since there is a
variable symbol (&NAME) in the name field
of statement 4, the required sequence symbol (.FTYPE) cannot be placed in the name
field.
Therefore, an ANOP
instruction
(statement 3) must be placed before statement 4.

The format of this instruction is:

r--------T-----------T--------------------,
I~ame

I Operation

I Operand

I

~--------+-----------+--------------------~

IA seIANOP
IBlank
I
I quence I
I
I
IL________
symbol LI ___________ LI ____________________ JI
If the programmer wants to use an AIF or
AGO instruction to branch to another statement, he must place a sequence symbol in
the name field of the statement to which he
wants to branch.
However, if the programmer has already entered a symbol or variable symbol in the name field of that
statement, he cannot place a sequence symbol in the name field.
Instead, the programmer must place an ANOP instruction
before the statement and then branch to the
ANOP instruction. This has the same effect
a:3 branching 1:0 the statement inunediately
after the ANOP instruction.
The following example illustrates the
use of the ANOP instruction.

r-------T----------T--------------------,

IName

IOperation IOperand

I

Then, if the type attribute of the first
operand is the letter F, the next statement
processed by the assembler is the statement
named by sequence symbol .FTYPE. The value
of &TYPE retains its initial null character
value because the SETC instruction is not
processed.
Since .FTYPE names an ANOP
instruction, the next statement processed
by the assembler is statement L~, the statement following the ANOP instruction.

CO~DITIONAL

ASSEMBLY ELEMENTS

The following chart summarizes the elements that can be used in each conditional
assembly instruction.
Each row in this
chart indicates which elements can be used
in a single conditional assembly instruction. Each column is used to indicate the
conditional assembly instructions in which
a particular element can be used.

~-------+----------+--------------------~
1
I MACRO
1
I

I&NAME

I
I
2 I & TYPE
3 I. FTYPI::
4 I&NA~ffi
I
I
I

1

I MOVE
I LCLC

lAIr'
I SE']'C
1ANOP
IST&TYPE
1L&']'YPE
IST&TYPE
1L&TYPE

I&T,&F
I
I &TYPE
I
I(T'&T EQ 'F').FTYPE I
1 E l l
I
1
12,SAVEAREA
1
12, &F
I
12,&T
I
12, SAVEAREA
I
I

1L _______ L1__________
MEND
LI ____________________ JI

90

The intersection of a column nnd a row
indicates whether an element can be used in
an instruction, and if so, in what fields
of the instruction the element can be used.
For example, the intersection of the first
row and the first column of the chart
indicates that symbolic parameters can be
used in the operand field of SETA instructions.

r---------------------------T-----------------------------T------,

1
Variable Symbols
1
1---------------------------1
1
1
SET Symbols
1

1
1
I

Attributes

1
1
1

r--------------------t-----------------------------+------~
L' 1 s' 1 Io ' 1 K l i N ' IS. S. 1
r-------t------T------T------T------t----T----T----T----T----T----t------~

1

1 S. p. 1 SETA 1 SETB 1 S ETC 1 T' 1

1
1 SETA
1

1
1
1

0

1
1 N,
1

1
I SETB
1

I
1
1

0

1
1 SETC
I

1
1
I

0

1
1 AIF
1

1
I
I

0

I
I AGO
I

1
I
I

I
I
I

1
1
I

1
I
I

I
I
I

I
I
I

I
I
I

I
1
I

I
I ANOP

I
I

I
I

I
1

I
I

I
1

I
I

I
I

I
I

0

1
1
1

1
1
1

03

I
1 N,O
1

1
1
1

0

1
I
I

0

1
I
I

N,O

I
1
1

0

1
1
I

0

0

1
1
1

1
1
1

0

1
1
1

02

1
1
I

0

I
1
1

02

1
1
1

0

1
1
1

02

1
1
1

0

1
1
1

02

1
10
1

1
1
1

1
1
1

1
1
102 1
1
1

1
1
1

1
I
I

1
1
I

~-------t------t------t------t------t----t----t----t----t----t----t------~

1
1
1

0

1
1
1

0

I
I
1

0

1
1
1

01

1
I
1

0

1
1
1

01

~-------t------t------+------t------t----t----t----t----t----t----t------~

1
1
1

1
1
1

I
1
I

1
I
1

1
1
I

~-------t------+------t------t------t----t----t----t----t----t----t------~

1
1
1

02

1
1
I

02

1 2 1
I 0 I
1
I

1 2 I
I 0 I N,O
1
1

1
1
1

1
I
I

1
I
I

I
IN, 0
1

I
I
I

1
I

I
I

1
I N

I
I

02

~-------t------t------+------t------t----t----t----t----t----t----t------~

~-------t------+------t------t------t----+----t----t----t----t----t------~

~-------t------t------t---·---t------t----t----t----t----t----t----t------~
IL _______
ACTR 1______
0
I ______
0
1______
0
I ______
03
0 I ____
0
I ____
0
1____
0
1____
0
1______ JI
L1____ L1____
~

1
I

1

1

3

2

~

~

~

~

Only in character relations
Only in arithmetic relations
Only if one to eight decimal digits

~

~

~

~

I
1
1

I

1

1

1

1 Abbreviations

1

I N

is Name
L' is Length Attribute
K'
is Count Attribute
1
l O i s Operand
S' is Scaling Attribute N'
is Number Attribute
1
I S.P.
is Symbolic II is Integer Attribute S.S. is Sequence Symbol
1
1L________________________________________________________________________
Parameter
J1

Section 9:

How to Write Conditional Assembly Instructions

91

SECTION 10:

The extended features of the macro language allow the programmer to:
1.

Terminate processing of a macro
definition.

2.

Generate error messages.

3.

Define global SET symbols.

4.

Define subscripted SET syrrbols.

5.

Use system variable symbols.

EXTENDED FEATURES OF THE MACRO LANGUAGE

must
be
the last
definition.
MEND
statement
of
every
macro-definition,
including those that contain one or more
MEXIT instructions.
The following example illustrates
use of the MEXIT instruction.

r-------T-----------T-------------------,
IName
I Operation I Operand
I
~-------+-----------+-------------------~

I

I
I
I&T,&F
I
1 I
IAIF
I (T'&T EQ 'F').OK
I
2 I
I MEXIT
I
I
3 I. OK
I ANOP
I
I
I&N~lli
1ST
12,SAVEAREA
I
I
IL
12, &F
I
liST
12,&T
I
I
IL
12,SAVEAREA
I
IL_______ I ___________
MEND
I ___________________ JI
I&NA~£

6.

Prepare keyword and mixed-mode macro
definitions and write keyword and
mixed-mode macro instructions.

7.

Use other System/360 macro
definitions.

the

I MACRO

I MOVE

~

~

MEXIT -- MACRO DEFINITION EXIT
The MEXIT instruction is used to indicate to the assembler that it should terminate processing of a macro-definition. The
format of this instruction is:

r------------T-----------T----------------,
I Operation I Operand
I

I Name

~------------+-----------+----------------~

IA sequence IMEXIT
I Blank
I
I symbol or
I
I
I
I ____________
blank
I ___________ I ________________ JI
L
~

Statement 1 is used to determine if the
type
attribute
of
the
first macroinstruction operand is the letter F.
If
the type attribute is the letter F, the
assembler processes the remainder of the
macro-definition starting with statement 3.
If the type attribute is not the letter F,
the
next
statement
processed by the
assembler is statement 2.
Statement 2
indicates to the assembler that it is to
terminate
processing
of
the
macrodefinition.

~

The ~£XIT instruction may only be used
in a macro-definition.
If the assembler processes an MEXIT
instruction that is in a macro-definition
corresponding
to
an
outer
macroinstruction, the next statement processed
by the assembler is the next statement
outside macro-definitions.
If the assembler processes an MEXIT
instruction that is in a macro-definition
corresponding to a second or third level
macro-instruction, the next statement processed by the assembler is the next statement after the second or third level macroinstruction in the macro definition,
respectively.
MEXIT should not be confused with MEND.
MEND
indicates
the
end of a macroSection 10:

MNOTE -- REQUEST FOR ERROR MESSAGE
The MNOTE instruction may be used to
request the assembler to generate an error
message.
The format of this instruction
is:

r----------T---------T--------------------,
IName
I Operation I Operand
I
~----------+---------+--------------------~

IA sequencelMNOTE
Isymbol ,
I
Ivariable
I
I symbol or I
Iblank
I
I
I

IA severity code,
I
I followed by
I
la comma, followed
I
Iby any combination I
I of chara cters enI
I closed in apostroI
I __________ I _________ I ____________________
phes
L
JI
~

~

Extended Features of the Macro Language

93

The operand of the MNOTE instruction may
also be written using one of the following
forms:

r-----------------------------------------,I

I Operand

.-----------------------------------------i
I severity-code, 'message'
I
I
I

' message'

I
I

Statement 1 is used to determine if the
type attributes o~ both macro-instruction
operands are the same.
If they are, statement 2 is the next statement processed by
the assembler.
If they are not,
statement
4 is the next statement processed by the
assembler. Statement 4 causes an error
message indicating the type attributes are
not the same to be printed in the source
program listing.

'message'
L _________________________________________
J

The ~NOTE instruction may only be used
in a macro-definition.
Variable symbols
may be used t,o generate the MNo'rE mnemonic
operation code" the severity code, and the
message.
The severity code may be a decimal
integer from 0 through 255 or an asterisk.
If it is omitted,
1 is assumed.
The
severity code indicates the severity of the
error, a higher severity code indicating a
more serious error.
When MNOTE *
the operand field
comment.

occurs, the statement in
will be printed as a

Two apostrophes
must
be
used
to
rE:!present an apostrophe enclosed in apostrophes in the operand field of an MNOTE
instruction.
One apostrophe will be listed
for each pair of apostrophes in the operand
field.
If any variable symbols are used in
t,he operand field of an MNOTE instruction,
they
will
be replaced by the values
assigned to them.
Two ampersands must be
used to represent an ampersand that is not
part of a variable symbol in the operand
field of an MNOTE statement. One ampersand
will be listed for each pair of ampersands
in the operand field.
The following example illustrates
use of the MNO'1~E instruction.

the

r-----T---------T----------------------,I
.-----+---------+----------------------i
I
MACRO
IName IOperationlOperand
I &NAME MOVE
MNOTE
AlF
AIF
ST
L
ST

I
1 I
2 I
3 I &NAME
I
I
I
I
4

94

L

I. Ml

I
5 I. lw12
I _____
L

&T,&F
*,'MOVE MACRO GEN'
(T'&T NE T'&F).M1
(T' &T NE 'FI). M2
2,SAVEAREA
2,&F
2,&T
2,SAVEAREA

~

MEXIT
I TYPE NOT SAME"
MNOTE
MEXIT
ITYPE NOT F'
MNOTE
MEND
_________ ______________________ J
~

Statement 2 is used to determine if the
type
attribute
of
the
first macroinstruction operand is the letter F.
If
the type attribute is the
letter
F,
statement 3 is the next statement processed
by the assembler.
If the attribute is not
the letter F,
statement 5 is the next
statement processed by
the
assembler.
Statement 5 causes an error message indicating the type attribute is not F to be
printed in the source program listing.

GLOBAL AND LOCAL VARIABLE SYMBOLS
The
boIs:

following

are

local variable sym-

1.

Symbolic parameters.

2.

Local SET symbols.

3.

system variable symbols.

Global SET symbols are the
variable symbols.

only

global

The GBLA,
GBLB,
and GBLC instructions
define global SET symbols,
just as the
LeLA.,
LeLB,
and LeLC instructions define
the SET symbols described in Section 9.
Hereinafter, SET symbols defined by LeLA,
LeLB, and LCLC instructions will be called
local SET symbols.
Global SET symbols communicate values
between statements in one or more macrodefinitions and statements outside macrodefinitions.
However,
local SET symbols
communicate values between statements in
the
same
macro-definition, or between
statements outside macro-definitions.
If a local SET symbol is defined in two
or more macro-definitions, or in a macrodefinition and outside macro-definitions,
the SET symbol is considered to be a
different
SET
symbol
in
each case.
However, a global SET symbol is the same
SET symbol each place it is defined.
A SET symbol must be defined as a global
SET symbol in each macro-definition in
which it is to be used as a global SET
symbol.
A SET symbol must be defined as a

global
SET
definitions,
global
SET
definitions.

-symbol
if it is
symbol

outside
macroto be used as a
outside
macro-

If the same SET symbol is defined as a
global SET symbol in one or wore places,
and as a local SET symbol elsewhere, it is
considered the same symbol wherever it is
defined as a global SET symbol, and a
different symbol wherever it is defined as
a local SET symbol.

macro-definition. All GBLA, GBLB, and GBLC
instructions outside macro-definitions must
appear before all LeLA, LCLR, and LCLC
instructions outside macro-definitions.

Defining Local and Global SET Symbols

Using Global and Local SET ~Y~_Qgl~
The following examples illustrate the
use of global and local SET symbols.
Each
example consists of two parts. The first
part is an assembler language source program. The second part shows the statements
that would be generated by the assembler
after it processed the statements in the
source program.

Local SET symbols are defined when they
appear in the operand field of an LCLA,
LCLB,
or
LCLC
instruction.
These
instructions are discussed in Section 9
under "Defining SET Symbols."

Example 1:
This example illustrates how
the same SET symbol can be used to communicate (1) values between statements in the
same macro-definition, and (2) diffe:r"ent
values between statements outside macrodefinitions.

Global SET symbols are defined when they
appear in the operand field of a GBLA,
GBLB, or GBLC instruction. The format of
these instructions is:

r-------T-----------T-------------------,
IName

1

~------+---------+------------------------~

2
3

I Operation I Operand

IBlank IGBLA,
I
IGBLB, or
I
IGBLC
IL-- ____ I _________
~

I

lOne or more variable
I
Isymbols that are to be I
lused as SET symbols,
I
Iseparated
by commas
________________________
JI

&NAME
&A

4
5

The programmer should not define any
global SET symbols whose first four characters are &SYS.
If a GBLA, GBLB, or GBLC instruction is
part of a macro-definition, it must immediately follow the prototype statement, or
another GBLA, GBLB, or GBLC instruction.
GBLA, GBLB, and GBLC instructions outside
macro-definitions must appear after all
macro-definitions in the source program,
before all conditional assembly instructions and PUNCH and REPRO statements outside
macro-definitions, and before the
first control section of the program.
All GBLA, GBLB, and GBLC instructions in
a macro-definition must appear before all
LeLA,
LCLB, and LCLC instructions in that
Section 10:

I

&A
15, &A
&A+l

LCLA
LOADA
LR
LOADA
LR
END

FIRST

~

The GBLA, GBLB, and GBLC instructions
define global SETA, SETB, and SETC symbols,
respectively, and assign the same initial
values as the corresponding types of local
SET symbols. However, a global SET symbol
is assigned an initial value by only the
first GBLA, GBLB, or GBLC instruction processed in which the symbol appears. Subsequent GBLA, GBLB, or GBLC instructions
processed by the assembler do not affect
the value assigned to the SET sywbol.

I Operand

MACRO
LOADA
LCLA
LR
SETA
MEND

&NAME ,

r------T---------T------------------------,

I Name

I Operation

.-------+-----------~-------------------~

6

&A
15,&A
15,&A
FIRST

~-------+-----------+-------------------~

IFIRST

ILR

I

I LR

I

I LR

I
I LR
I _______ lEND
L
___________
~

115,0
I
115,0
I
115,0
I
115,0
I
I ___________________
FIRST
JI

~

&A is defined as a local SETA symbol in
a
macro definition
(statement
1) and
outside ~acro definitions (statement 4).
&A is used twice
within
the
macro
definition (statements 2 and 3) and twice
outside macro definitions (statements 5 and
6) •

Since &A is a local SETA symbol in the
macro definition
and
outside
macro
definitions, it is one SETA symbol in the
macro definition, and another SETA symbol
outside
macro definitions.
Therefore;
statement
3
(which
is
in
the
macro definition) does not affect the value
used for &A in statements 5 and 6 (which
are outside macro definitions). Moreover,
the use of LOADA between statements 5 and 6
will alter &A from its" previous value as a
local symbol within that macro definition
since the first act of the maGro definition
is to LeLA &A to zero.
Extended Features of the Macro Language

95

r-------T-----------T-------------------,
I Operation I Operand
1

Example 2: This example illustrates how a
SET symbol can be used to communicate
values between statements that are part of
a macro-definition and statements outside
macro-definitions.

r-------T-----------T-------------------,
I Name
I Operation I Operand
I
~-------+-----------+-------------------~

&NAME
1

MACRO
LOADA
GBI~A

&NAME
&A

2

3
4

FIRST
5
6

LR
SE'l'A
MEND
GBIA
LOADA
LR
LOADA
LR
END

&A
15" &A
&A+l
&A
15,&A
15, &A
FIRST

I Name

.-------+-----------+-------------------~

I

I &NAME
1 I
2 1&NAME

3 1&A

I
I
I
I
4 I
5 I
6 I &A
I
I
I FIRST
I
I
I
I

LOADA
LOADB
LOADA
LOADB
END

FIRST

I
I

Example 4: This example illustrates how a
SET symbol can be used to communicate
values between statements that are part of
two different macro-definitions.

Since &A is a global SETA symbol in the
macro-definition
and
outside
macrodefinitions, it is the same SETA symbol in
both cases. Therefore, statement 3 (which
is in the macro-definition) affects the
value used for &A in statements 5 and 6
(which are outside macro-definitions).

r-------T-----------T-------------------,
I Name
I Operation I Operand
1
.-------+-----------+-------------------~

&NAl'.IE
1

Example 3:
This example illustrates how
the
same
SET symbol can be used to
communicate: (1) values between statements
in one macro-definition~ and (2) different
values between statements in a different
macro-definition.

2
3

&A is defined as a local SETA symbol in
two different macro-definitions (statements
1 and 4). &A is used twice within each
macro-definition (statements 2, 3., 5, and

5

&NAME
&A

4

96

&A
15,&A
&A+l

ILR
115,0
1
ILR
115,0
1
ILR
115,0
1
I
ILR
115,0
1
IL.. ______ .LI END
I FIRST
___________ .L
___________________ JI

ILR
115,0
I
ILR
115,1
I
I LR
115,1
I
I
I LR
115" 2
I
I _______ .LI END
I FIRST
L
___.________ .L,
____________________ JI

Since &A is a local SETA symbol in each
macro-definition, it is one SETA symbol in
one macro-definition, and another SETA symbol in the other macro-definition. Therefore, statement 3 (which
is
in
one
macro-definition) does not affect the value
used for &A in statement 5 (which is in the
other macro-definition). Similarly" statement 6 does not affect the value used for
&A in statement 2.

MACRO
LOADB
LCLA
LR
SETA
MEND

IFIRST

I FIRST

I
I

6) •

&A
15,&A
&A+l

.-------+-----------+-------------------~

.-------+-----------+-------------------~

&A is defined as a global SETA symbol in
a macro-definition (statement 1) and outside macro-definitions (statement 4).
&A
is used twice within the macro··defini tion
(statements 2 and 3) and twice outside
macro-definitions (statements 5 and 6).

MACRO
LOADA
LeLA
LR
SETA
MEND

6

&A
FIRST

MACRO
LOADA
GBLA
LR
SETA
MEND

&A
15,&A
&A+l

MACRO
LOADB
GBLA
LR
SETA
MEND

&A
15., &A
&A+l

LOADA
LOADB
LOADA
LOADB
END
FIRST
.-------+-----------+-------------------~
I FIRST ILR
115,0
I
115 I' 1
I
I
I LR
I
I LR
115 I' 2
I
I
I LR
115" 3
I
IL_______.LlEND
I ___________________
FIRST
___________ .L
JI

&A is defined as a global SETA symbol in
two different macro-definitions (statements
1 and 4).
&A is used twice within each
macro-definition (statements 2,
3, 5 and
6) •

Since &A is a global SETA symbol in each
macro-definition,
it is the same SETA symbol in each macro-definition.
Therefore,
statement
3
(which
is
in
one
macro-definition) affects the value used
for &A in statement 5 (which is in the
other macro-definition). Sirr~larly, statement 6 affects the value used for &A in
statement 2.
Example 5:
This example illustrates how
the same SET symbol can be used to comrounicate: (1) values between statements in two
different macro-definitions, and (2) different values between statements outside
macro-definitions.

r-------T-----------T-------------------,
I Name
I Operation I Operand
I
~-------+-----------+-------------------~

MACRO
LOADA
GBLA
LR
SETA
MEND

&NAME
1
2
3

&NArviE
&A

MACRO
LOADB
GBLA
LR
SETA
MEND

4
5
6

&A

LCLA
LOAD A
LOADB
LR
LOADA
LOADB
LR
END

7

FIRST
8

9

Therefore, statement 3 (which is in one
macro-definition) affects the value used
for &A in statement 5 (which is in the
other macro-definition), but it does not
affect the value used for &A in statements
8
and
9
(which
are
outside
macro-definitions). Similarly, statement 6
affects the value used for &A in statement
2, but it does not affect the value used
for &A in statements 8 and 9.

Subscripted SET Symbols
Both global and local SET symbols may be
defined as subscripted SET symbols. The
local SET symbols defined in Section 9 were
all nonsubscripted SET symbols.

&A
15, &A
&A+l

subscripted SET symbols provide the programmer with a convenient way to use one
SET symbol plus a subscript to refer to
many
arithmetic,
binary, or character
values.

&A
15,&A
&A+l

A subscripted SET symbol consists of a
SET symbol immediately followed by a subscript that is enclosed in parentheses.
The subscript may be any arithmetic expression that is allowed in the operand field
of a SETA statement. The subscript may not
be 0 or negative.

&A
The following are valid subscripted
symbols.

SET

15,&A
&READER (1 7)
&A23456(&S4)
&X4F2(25+&A2)

15,&A
FIRST

~-------+-----------+-------------------~

I FIRST

ILR
115,0
I
I
I LR
115,1
I
I
I LR
115,0
I
I
I LR
115,2
I
I
I LR
115,3
I
115,0
I
I
I LR
Il _______ lEND
FIRST
___________ I ___________________
JI
~

Since &A is a global SETA symbol in each
macro-definition, it is the same
SETA
symbol in each macro-definition. However,
since &A is a local SETA symbol outside
macro-definitions,
it is a different SETA
symbol outside macro-definitions.

~

&A is defined as a global SETA symbol in
two different macro-definitions (statements
1 and 4), but it is defined as a local SETA
symbol outside macro-definitions (statement
7).
&A is used twice within each macrodefinition
and
twice
outside
macrodefinitions (statements 2, 3, 5, 6, 8 and
9).

Section 10:

The following
SET symbols.
&X4F2
( 25)
&X4F2 (25)

are

invalid subscripted

(no subscript)
(no SET symbol)
(subscript does not
immediately follow
SET symbol)

Defining Subscripted SET Symbols:
If the
programmer wants to use a subscripted SET
symbol, he must write in a GBLA, GBLB,
GBLC, LCLA, LCLB, or LCLC instruction, a
SET symbol immediately followed by a decimal integer enclosed in parentheses. The
decimal integer, called a dimension, indicates the number of SET variables associated with the SET symbol. Every variable
associated with a SET symbol is aSSigned an
Extended Features of the Macro Language

97

initial value that is the same as the
initial value assigned to the corresponding
type of nonsubscripted SET symbol.
If a subscripted SET symbol is defined
as global, the same dimension must be used
with the SET symbol each time it is defined
as global.
The maximum dimension that can be used
with a SETA, SETB, or SETC symbol is 2500.
A subscripted SET symbol may be used
if the declaration was subscripted; a
nonsubscripted SET symbol may be used only
if the declaration had no subscript.
~nly

The following statements dE~fine
the
global SET symbols &SBOX, &WBOX, and &PSW,
and the local SET symbol &TSW.
&SBOX has
50 arithmetic variables associated with it,
&WBOX has 20 character variables, &PSW and
&TSw each have 230 binary variables.

r------T-----------T----------------------,
I Operation I Operand
I

I Name

~------+-----------+----------------------~
IGBLA
I &SBOX(SO)
I
I
I GBLC
I &WBOX (20)
I
I
IGBLB
I&PSW(230)
I
Il ______ I ___________
LCLB
I&TSW(230)
______________________ JI

I

~

~

Usjng Subscripted SET Symbols:
After the
programmer ha!2; associated a number of SET
variables with a SET symbol, he may assign
values to each of the variables and use
them in other statements.
If the statements in the previous example were part of a macro-definition, (and
&A was defined as a SETA symbol in the same
definition), the following statements could
be part of the same macro-definition.

r----------T----------T-----------------,
I Name
IOperation IOperand
I
1
2
3
4
5

~----------+----------+-----------------~

I &A
I SETA
I5
I
I SETB
I (6 LT 2)
I
I &PSW ( &A)
I &TSW( 9)
I SETB
t (&PSW (&A) )
I
I
IA
12,=F'&SBOX(4S)'
I
Il __________ ICLI
'Ij
__________ IAREA,C'&WBOX(17)
_________________
~

~

Statement 1 assigns the arithmetic value
5 1:0 the nonsubscripted SETA symbol &A.
Statements 2 and 3 then assign the binary
value 0 to subscripted SETB symbols &PSW(S)
and &TSW(9), respectively.
Statements 4
and 5 generate statements that add the
value assigned to &SBOX(4S} to general
register 2, and compare the value assigned
to &WBOX(17) to the value stored at AREA,
respectively.
98

SYSTEM VARIABLE SYMBOLS
System variable symbols are local variable symbols that are assigned values automatically by the assembler.
There are
three system variable symbols: &SYSNDX,
&SYSECT, and &SYSLIST.
System variable
symbols may be used in the name, operation
and operand fields of statements in macrodefinitions, but not in statements outside
macro-definitions. They may not be defined
as symbolic parameters or SET symbols, nor
may they be assigned values by SETA, SETB,
and SETC instructions.

&SYSNDX -- Macro Instruction Index
The system variable symbol &SYSNDX may
be concatenated with other characters to
create
unique
names
for
statements
generated from the same model statement.
&SYSNDX is assigned the four-digit number 0001 for the first macro-instruction
processed by the assembler, and it is
incremented by one for each subsequent
inner and outer macro instruction processed.
If &SYSNDX is used in a model statement,
SETC or MNOTE instruction, or a character
relation in a SETB or AIF instruction, the
value substituted for &SYSNDX is the fourdigit number of the macro-instruction being
processed, including leading zeros.
If
&SYSNDX
appears
in
arithmetic
expressions (e.g., in the operand field of
a SETA instruction), the value used for
&SYSNDX is an arithmetic value.
Throughout
one
use
of
a
macrodefinition, the value of &SYSNDX may be
considered a constant, independent of any
inner macro-instruction in that definition.
The
example
in
the
next
column
illustrates these rules.
It is assumed
that the first macro-instruction processed,
OUTERI, is the 106th macro-instruction
processed by the assembler.
statement 7
is
the
106th
macroinstruction processed. Therefore, &SYSNDX
is assigned the number 0106 for that macroinstruction.
The
number
0106
is
substituted for &SYSNDX when it is used in
statements 4 and 6. statement 4 is used to
assign the character value 0106 to the SETC
symbol &NDXNUM.. statement 6 is used to
create the unique name B0106.

r----------T-----------T----------------,
I Name
I Operation IOperand
I
~----------+-----------+----------------~

1

A&SYSNDX

2
3

&NAME
4

&NDXNUM
&NAME

5
6

B&SYSNDX

MACRO
INNERl
GBLC
SR
CR
BE
B
MEND

&NDXNUM
2,5
2,5
B&NDXNUM
A&SYSNDX

MACRO
OUTERl
GBLC
SETC
SR
AR
INNERl

&NDXNUM
• &SYSNDX'
2,,4
2,6
2,=F'1000'

S

MEND
~----------+-----------+----------------~

7 I ALPHA
8 I BETA

I OUTERl
IOUTERl

I
I

B0106
BETA
A0109

L B010a
__________

~

AR
SR
CR
BE
B
S
SR
AR
SR
CR
BE
B
S
___________

~

The system variable symbol &SYSECT may
be used to represent the name of the
control
section
in
which
a
macroinstruction appears. For each inner and
outer macro-instruction processed by the
assembler, &SYSECT is assigned a value that
is the name of the control section in which
the macro-instruction appears.
When
&SYSECT
is used in a macrodefinition.,
the
value substituted for
&SYSECT is the name of the last CSECT,
occurs
DSECT, or START statement that
before the macro-instruction. If no named
CSECT, DSECT, or START statements occur
before a macro-instruction, &SYSECT
is
assigned a null character value for that
macro-instruction.

I

I

~----------+-----------+----------------~
ALPHA
SR
2,4

A0107

&SYSECT -- Current control Section

2,6
2,5
2,5
B0106
A0107
2,=F'lOOO'
2,4
2,6
2,,5
2,5
B0108
A0109
2,=F'lOOO'
________________
J

statement 5
is
the
107th
macroinstruction processed. Therefore, &SYSNDX
is assigned the number 0107 for that macroinstruction.
The
number
0107
is
substituted for &SYSNDX when it is used in
statements 1 and 3.
The number 0106 is
substituted for the global SETC symbol
&NDXNUM in statement 2.
statement
a
is
the
108th ma,croinstruction
processed.
Therefore, each
occurrence of &SYSNDX is replaced by the
number 0108. For example, statement 6 is
used to create the unique name B0108.
When statement 5 is used to process the
108th
macro-instruction,
statement
5
becomes the 109th macro-instruction processed.
Therefore,
each occurrence of
&SYSNDX is replaced by the number 0109.
For example, statement 1 is used to create
the unique name A0109.
Section 10:

CSECT or DSECT statements processed in a
macro-definition
affect
the value for
&SYSECT for any subsequent inner macroinstructions in that definition, and for
any
other
outer
and
inner
macroinstructions.
Throughout
the
use
of
a
macrodefinition, the value of &SYSECT may be
consid~red a constant, independent
of any
CSECT or DSECT statements or inner macroinstructions in that definition.
The
rules.

next

example

illustrates

these

Statement a is the last CSECT, DSECT, or
START statement processed before statement
9 is processed.
Therefore, &SYSECT is
assigned the value MAINPROG for macroinstruction
OUTERl
in
statement
9.
MAINPROG is substituted for &SYSECT when it
appears in statement 6.
statement 3 is the last CSECT, DSECT, or
START statement processed before statement
4 is processed.
Therefore, &SYSECT is
assigned
the
value CSOUTl for macroinstruction INNER in statement 4.
CSOUTl
is substituted for &SYSECT when it appears
in statement 2.
Statement 1 is used to generate a CSECT
statement for statement 4.
This is the
last CSECT, DSECT, or START statement that
appears before statement 5.
Therefore,
&SYSECT is assigned the value INA for
macro-instruction INNER in statement 5.
INA is substituted for &SYSECT when it
appears in statement 2.
Extended Features of the Macro Language

99

r----------T-----------T---------------,
I Operation I Operand
I
•----------t-----------t---------------i
MACRO

I Name

INNER
CSECT
DC
MEND

&INC SECT

1
2

A(&SYSECT)

MACRO
OUTERl
CSECT
DS
INNER
INNER
DC
MEND

CSOUTl

3

&INCSECT

4

'5
6

7

If the value of subscript n is zero, then
&SYSLIST(n) is assigned the value specified
in the name field of the macro instruction,
except when it is a sequence symbol.

100C
INA
INB
A (&SYSECT)

MACRO
OUTER2
DC
MEND

AC&SYSECT)

•----------t-----------t---------------~
ICSECT
I
I

B IMAINPROG
I
9 I
10 I

IDS
IOUTERl
IOUTER2

1200C
I
I

I
I
I

IDS
ICSECT
IDS
ICSECT
IDC
ICSECT
IDC
IDC
IDC

1200C
I
1100C
I
IACCSOUT1)

I
I
I
I
I

.----------t-----------t---------------i
I MAINPROG I CSECT
I
I

I
ICSOUTl
I
I INA
I
IINB
I
I

I

l----------~

&SYSLIST(n) may be used to refer to the
nth positional macro instruction operand •
In addition, if the nth operand is a
sublist, then &SYSLIST (n,m) may be used
to refer to the mth operand in the sublist.
where nand m may be any arithmetic
expressions allowed in the operand field
of a SETA statement. m may be equal to or
greater than land n has a range of 1 to
200.

The type g length, scaling, integer, and
count
attributes
of
&SYSLISTCn)
and
&SYSLIST{n,m) and the number attributes of
&SYSLIST(n) and &SYSLIST may be used in
conditional
assembly
instructions .
N'&SYSLIST may be used to refer to the total number of positional operands in a macroinstruction statement.
N'&SYSLIST(n) may
be used to refer to the number of operands
in a sublist.
If the nth operand is
omitted, N' is zero; if the nth operand is
not a sublist, N' is one.
The
following procedure
evaluate N'&SYSLIST:

is

used

to

I

I

1. A sublist is considered to be one

IA(INA)
I ACMAINPROG)
IACINB)

I
I
I
J

2. The count includes operands specifically
omitted (by means of commas) .

___________ _______________
~

opera~d.

Examples:
Statement 1 is used to generate a CSECT
statement for statement 5.
This is the
last CSECT, DSECT, or START statement that
appears before statement 10.
Therefore,
&SYSECT is assigned the valu(~ INB for
macro instruction OUTER2 in statement 10.
INE is substituted for &SYSECT when it
appears in statement 7.

&S_YSLIST -- Macro Instruction Operand

N'&SYSLIST

Macro Instruction
MAC
MAC
MAC
MAC
MAC

o

Kl=DS
,Kl=DC
FULL"F, ('1','2'),Kl=DC
,

Attributes are discussed
under "Attributes."

1
4
2

o
in

Section

7

The
system variable symbol &SYSLIST
provides the programmer with an alternative
to symbolic parameters for referring to
positional macro instruction operands.

KEYWORD

&SYSLIST and symbolic parameters may be
used in the same macro definition.

Keyword macro definitions provide the
programmer with an alternate way of preparing macro ·definitions.

&SYSLIST(O) may be used to refer to a
symbolic parameter in the macro instruction prototype. If the symbolic parameter is omitted in the macro instruction
prototype, then &SYSLIST(O) would refer
to a null character value.
100

~ACRO

A

DEFINITIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS

keyword macro· definition enables a
to reduce the number of operands
in each macro instruction that corresponds
to the definition, and to write the operands in any order.
progra~mer

The macro instructions that correspond
to the macro definitions described in Section 7 (hereinafter
called
positional
macro instructions and positional macro
definitions,
respectively)
require the
operands to be written in the same order as
the corresponding symbolic parameters in
the operand field of the prototype statement.
In a keyword macro definition, the programmer can assign standard values to any
symbolic parameters that appear in the

Section 10:

Extended Features of the Macro Language

100.1

operand field of the prototype statement.
The standard value assigned to a symbolic
parameter is substituted for the symbolic
parameter, if the programmer does not write
anything in the operand field of the macro
instruction to correspond to the symbolic
parameter.
When a keyword macro instruction
is
written, the programmer need only write one
operand for each symbolic parameter whose
value he wants to change.

The following keyword prototype statement contains a symbolic parameter in the
name field, and four operands in the operand field. ~he first two operands contain
standard values.
The mnemonic operation
code is MOVE.

r------T-----------T----------------------,
I Name I Operation I Operand
I
~------+-----------+----------------------~

I&N
L _____ I MOVE
___________ I&R=2,&A=S,&T=,&F=
______________________ JI
~

Keyword macro definitions are prepared
the
same
way
as
positional
macro
definitions, except that the
prototype
statement is written differently. The
rules for preparing positional macrodefinitions are in Section 7.

~

Keyword Macro Instruction
After a programmer has prepared a keyword macro definition he may use it by
writing a keyword macro instruction.

Keyword Prototype
The format of this statement is:

r------------T-----------T----------------,
I Operation I Operand
I

The
format
instruction is:

of

a

keyword

macro

I Name

~------------+-----------+----------------~

IA symbolic IA symbol
lOne or more
I
I parameter
I
loperands of the I
lor blank
I
Iform described I
I
I
I below, separated I
commas
I ____________ I ___________ Iby
L
________________
JI
~

~

r---------T---------T---------------------,
I Name
IOperationlOperand
I
~---------+---------+---------------------~

IA symbol, I Mnemonic IZero or more operands I
Isequence loperationlof the form described I
I code
I below, separated by I
I symbol,
lor
blank I _________ I commas
L
_________
_____________________ JI
~

Each operand must consist of a symbolic
parameter, immediately followed by an equal
sign and optionally followed by a standard
value.
This value must not include a
keyword.
A standard value that is
operand must immediately follow
sign.

part of an
the equal

Anything that may be used as an operand
in
a macro instruction except variable
symbols, may be used as a standard value in
a keyword prototype statement.
The rules
for forming valid macro instruction operands are detailed in section 8.
The following are valid
type operands.

keyword

proto-

&READER=
&LOOP2=SYMBOL
&S4==F'4096'
The following are invalid keyword prototype operands.
CARDAREA
&TYPE
&TWO =123

(no symbolic parameter)
(no equal sign)
(equal sign does not
immediately follow
symbolic parameter)
&AREA= X'189A' (standard value does
not immediately follow
equal sign)
Section 10:

~

Each
operand consists of a keyword
immediately followed by an equal sign and
an optional value which may not include a
keyword. A;nything that may be used as an
operand in a positional macrc instruction
may be used as a value in a keyword
macro-instruction.
The rules for forming
valid positional macro instruction operands
are detailed in Section 8.
A keyword consists of one through seven
letters and digits, the first of which must
be a letter.

The keyword part of each keyword macro
instruction operand must correspond to one
of the symbolic parameters that appears in
the operand field of the keyword prototype
statement.
A keyword corresponds to a
symbolic parameter if the characters of the
keyword are identical to the characters of
the symbolic parameter that follow the
ampersand.
The following are valid
instruction operands.

keyword

macro

LOOP2=SYMBOL
S4==F' 4096'
TO=
Extended Features of the Macro Language

101

:- Na-m~ - -: - op-e;atio-n - : - oP"e-;;nd:

The following are invalid keyword macroinstruction operands.
&X4F2=0(2,3)
CARDAREA=A+2
=(TO(S), (FROM»

(keyword does not begin
with a letter)
(keyword is more than
seven characters)
(no keyword)

The operands in
a
keyword
macroinstruction may be written in any order.
If
an
operand appeared in a keyword
prototype stat.ement, a corresponding operand does not have to appear in the keyword
macro-instruction. If an operand is omitted, the comma that would have separated i·t
from the next operand need not be written.
The following rules are used to replace
the symbolic parameters in the statements
of a keyword macro-definition.
1.

If a symbolic parameter appE~ars in the
name field of the prototype statement,
and the name field of t:he macroinstruction contains a symbol, the
symbolic parameter is replaced by the
symbol.
If the name field of the
macro-instruction is blank or contains
a
sequence
symbol,
the symbolic
parameter is replaced by a null character value.

:- -

- - -

-1- -

-

-

-,- -

-

I - - - ---""I

1 I
:
GBLC
2 : &VALUE 1 SETC

1
&VALUE 1
: ' A=FB' :
3 1,_____ IL ________
MAC
I,_______
&VALUE II

The following keyword macro-definition,
keyword macro-instruction, and generated
statements illustrate these rules.

r-----T----------T----------------------,
IName IOperation IOperand
I
.-----+----------+----------------------~

I
1

2
3

4
5

I MACRO
I&N
IMOVE
I &N
I ST
I
IL
liST
I
IL
I
I MEND

I
I&R=2,&A=S,&T=,&F=
I &R, &A
I &R , &F
I&R,&T
I &R, &A

I
I
I
I
I
I

I

I

.-----+----------+----------------------~

6 IHERE IMOVE
IT=FA,F=FB,A=THERE
I
.-----+----------+----------------------~
IHERE 1ST
12,THERE
I
IlL
12, FB
1
I
1ST
12, FA
1
1L_____ I L
THERE
__________ 12,
______________________
JI
~

~

2.

If a symbolic parameter appears in the
operand field of the prototype statement, and the macro-instruction contains a keyword that corresponds to
the
symbolic parameter,
the value
assigned to the keyword replaces the
symbolic parameter.

statement 1 assigns the standard values
2 and S to the symbolic parameters &R and
&A,
respectively. Statement 6 assigns the
values FI~, FB, and THERE to the keywords T,
F, and A, respectively. The symbol HERE is
used in the name field of statement 6.

3.

If a symbolic parameter was assigned a
standard value by a prototype statement, and the macro-instruction does
not contain a keyword that corresponds
to the symbolic parameter, the standard value assigned to the symbolic
parameter replaces the symbolic parameter.
Otherwise, the symbolic parameter is rE~placed by a null character
value.

Since a symbolic parameter (&N) appears
in the name field of the prototype statement (statement 1), and the corresponding
characters (HERE) of the macro-instruction
(statement 6) are a symbol, &N is replaced
by HERE in statement 2.

No~e

1: If a standard value is a selfdefining term the type attribute assigned
to the standard value is the letter N.
If
a
standard value is omitted the type
attribute assigned to the standard value is
the letter o. All other standard values
are assigned the type attribute U.

2: Positional parameters cannot be
changed to keywords by substitution. That
isp in the following example, the expression
A=FB, statement 2, will be treated as a
positional operand consisting of a character
string in the generation of the MAC macro·
it will not be treated as a keyword A with
the value FB.
No~e

102

Since &T appears in the operand field,
of statement 1, and statement 6 contains
the keyword (T) that corresponds to &T, the
value assigned to T (FA) replaces &T in
statement
4.
Similarly, FB and THERE
replace &F and &A in statement 3 and in
sta·tements 2 and 5,
respectively. Note
that the value assigned to &A in statement
6 is used instead of the value assigned to
&A in statement 1.
Since &R appears in the operand field of
statement 1, and statement 6 does not
contain a corresponding keyword., the value
aSSigned to &R (2), replaces &R in statements 2, 3, 4, and 5.
Operand Sublists: The value assigned to a
keyword and the standard value assigned to

a symbolic parameter may be an operand
sublist. Anything that ~ay be used as an
operand sublist in a positional macroinstruction may be used as a value in a
keyword macro-instruction and as a standard
value in a keyword prototype statement.
The
rules
for
forming valid operand
sublists are detailed in Section 8 under
"Operand Sublists."
Keyword Inner Macro Instructions: Keyword
and positional inner macro instructions may
be used as model statements in either
keyword or positional macro definitions.

Mixed-mode macro definitions are prepared the same way as positional macro'
definitions,
except that the prototype
statement is written differently. If &SYSLIST is used, it refers only to the positional operands in the macro instruction.
Subscripting past the last positional
parameter will yield an empty string and
a type attribute of "0". The rules for
preparing positional macro definitions
are in Section 7.
Mixed-Mode Prototype
The format of this statement is:
r---~-------T-----------T-----------------'

I Operand

I

~-----------+-----------+-----------------~

IA symbolic IA symbol
lOne or more oper-I
I parameter I
lands of the form I
lor blank
I
Idescribed below, I
I
I
Iseparated by
I
lI ___________ I ___________ I _________________
commas
JI
~

lI&N
_______

I _________
MOVE
I&TY,&P,&R,&TO=,&F=
_______________________ JI

~

~

Mixed-Mode Macro-Instruction
The format of
instruction is:

~

The operands must be valid operands of
positional
and
keyword
prototype
statements. All the positional operands
must precede the first keyword operand.
The rules for forming positional operands
are
discussed
in
Section
7.,
under
"Macro-Instruction Prototype."
The rules
for forming keyword operands are discussed
above under "Keyword Prototype."

mixed-mode

macro-

r---------T---------T---------------------,
IOperationlOperand
I

IA symbol, I Mnemonic I Zero or more operands I
Isequence loperationlof the form described I
,symbol,
I code
I below, separated by I
blank I _________ I _____________________
commas
llor
_________
JI
~

The
following
sample
mixed-mode
prototype statement contains three pOSitional operands and two keyword operands.

~

The operand field consists of two parts.
The
first
part
corresponds
to
the
positional prototype operands. This part
of the operand field is written in the same
way that the operand field of a positional
macro-instruction is written.
The rules
for writing pOSitional macro-instructions
are in Section 8.
The second part of the operand field
corresponds to the keyword prototype operands.
This part of the operand field is
written in the same way that the operand
field of a keyword macro-instruction is
written. The rules for writing keyword
macro-instructions are
described
above
under "Keyword Macro-Instruction."
The
following
mixed-mode
macrodefinition, mixed-mode macro-instruction,
and generated statements illustrate these
facilities.

r------T---------T----------------------,
IOperationl Operand
,

IName

~------+---------+----------------------~

I
1 I&N
I&N
I
I
,

IMACRO
IMOVE
IST&TY
IL&TY
IST&TY
IL&TY

I
I tTY,&P,&R,tTO=,tF=
I &R,SAVE
I tR,&P&F
I &R,tP&TO
,&R,SAVE

I
I
,
I
,
,

~------+---------+----------------------~

2 IHERE

I MOVE

,H,,2,F=FB,TO=FA

,

~------+---------+----------------------~

I HERE ISTH
,2,SAVE
I
I
ILH
I 2,FB
I
I
ISTH
,2,FA
I
2,SAVE
lI ______ ILH
_________ I ______________________
JI
~

Section 10:

a

~---------+---------+---------------------~

Mixed-mode macro' definitions allow the
programmer to use the features of keyword
and positional macro definitions in the
same macro definition.

IOperation

~-------+---------+-----------------------~

IName

MIXED-MODE MACRO DEFINITIONS AND
INSTRUCTIONS

I Name

r-------T---------T-----------------------,
I Name
I Operation I Operand
I

~

The prototype statement (statement 1)
contains three positional operands (&TY,&P,
and &R) and two keyword operands (&TO and
Extended Features of the Macro Language

103

In the macro instruction (statement
2) the positional operands are written in
the same order as the positional operands
in the prototype statement (the second
operand is omitted). The keyword operands
are written in an order that is different
from the order of keyword operands in the
prototype statement.
&F') •

Mixed-mode inner macro instructions may
be used as model statements in mixed-mode,
keyword, and positional macro-definitions.
Keyword
and
positional
inner
macroinstructions
may
be
used
as
model
statements in mixed-mode macro definitions.

104

MACRO DEFINITION COMPATIBILITY
Macro definitions prepared for use with
the other System/360 assemblers
having
macro language facilities may be used with
the Operating System/360 assembler provided
that all SET symbols are defined in an
appropriate LCLB, GBLA, GBLB, or
GBLC
statement.
The AIFB and AGOB instructions
will
be
processed
by
the Operating
System/360 assembler the same way that the
AIF and AGO instructions are processed.
AIFB and AGOB instructions will cause the
count set up by the ACTR instructions to be
decremented in exactly the same way as the
AGO and AIF instructions.

APPENDIXES

APPENDIX A: CHARACTER CODES
APPENDIX B: HEXADECIMAL-DECIMAL NUMBER CONVERSION TABLE
APPENDIX C: MACHINE-INSTRUCTION FORMAT
APPENDIX D: MACHINE-INSTRUCTION MNEMONIC OPERATION CODES
APPENDIX E: ASSEMBLER INSTRUCTIONS
APPENDIX F: SUMMARY OF CONSTANTS
APPENDIX G: MACRO LANGUAGE SUMMARY
APPENDIX H: SAMPLE PROGRAM
APPENDIX I: ASSEMBLER LANGUAGES--FEATURES COMPARISON CHART
APPENDIX J:

SAMPLE MACRO DEFINITIONS

APPENDIX A:

CHARACTER CODES

r------------T-----------------T---------T---------T-----------------,
System/360
Character Set
EBCDIC

I
I

I

I

I

I

I

8-bit
I
Punch
I
I
HexaI
Printer
I
I Code
I
Combination
I Decimal I Decimal I
Graphics
I
~------------+-----------------+---------+---------+-----------------i
00000000
12,0,9,8,1
0
00
00000001
12,9,1
1
01
00000010
12,9,2
2
02
00000011
12,9,3
3
03
00000100
12,9,4
4
04
00000101
12,9,5
5
05
00000110
12,9,6
6
06
00000111
12,9,7
7
07
00001000
12,9,8
8
08
00001001
12,9,8,1
9
09
00001010
12,9,8,2
10
OA
00001011
12,9,8,3
11
OB
00001100
12,9,8,4
12
OC
00001101
12,9,8,5
13
00
00001110
12,9,8,6
14
OE
~0001111
12,9,8,7
15
OF
00010000
12,11,9,8,1
16
10
00010001
11,9,1
17
11
00010010
11,9,2
18
12
00010011
11,9,3
19
13
00010100
11,9,4
20
14
00010101
11,9,5
21
15
00010110
11,9,6
22
16
00010111
11,9,7
23
iJ
00011000
11,9,8
24
18
00011001
11,9,8,1
25
19
00011010
11~9,8,2
26
1A
00011011
11,9,8~3
27
lB
00011100
11,9,8,4
28
1C
00011101
11,9~8,5
29
lD
00011110
11,9,8,6
30
1E
00011111
11,9,8,7
31
1F
00100000
11,0,9,8,1
32
20
00100001
0,9,1
33
21
00100010
0,9,2
34
22
00100011
0,9,3
35
23
00100100
0,9,4
36
24
00100101
0,9,5
37
25
00100110
0,9,6
38
26
00100111
0~9,7
39
27
00101000
0,9,8
40
28
00101001
0,9,8,1
41
29
00101010
0,9#8~2
42
2A
00101011
0,9,8,3
43
2B
00101100
0,9,8,4
44
2C
00101101
0,9,8,5
45
2D
00101110
0,9,8,6
46
2E
00101111
0,9,8,7
47
2F
00110000
12,11,0,9,8,1
48
30
00110001
9,1
49
31
00110010
9,2
50
32
------------~-----------------~---------~---------~-----------------

Appendix A:

Character Codes

107

r------------T-----------------T---------T---------T------------------,
Character Set I
I
I
EBCDIC
I

I Systern/360 I
I
I 8-bit
I
I Code

Punch
I
I Hexa- I
Printer
I
combination
I Decimal I Decimal I
Graphics
I
~-~----------+-----------------+---------+---------+-----------------~
00110011
9,3
51
I
33
I
00110100
9,4
52
I
34
I
00110101
9,5
53
I
35
I
00110110
9,6
54
I
36
00110111
9,7
55
I
37
00111000
9~8
56
I
38
Ofrl11001
9,8,1
57
I
39
00111010
9,8,2
58
I
3A
00111011
9,8,3
59
I
3B
00111100
9,8,4
60
3C
00111101
9,8,5
61
3D
00111110
9,8,6
62
3E
00111111
9,8,7
63
3F
(blank)
01000000
64
40
01000001
12,0,9,1
65
41
01P00010
12,0,9,2
66
42
01000011
12,0,9,3
67
43
01000100
12,0,9,4
68
44
01000101
12,0,9,5
69
45
01000110
12,0,9,6
70
46
01000111
12,0,9,7
71
47
01001000
12,0,9,8
72
48
01001001
12,8,1'
73
49
f (cent sign)
01001010
12,8,2
74
4A
. (period)
01001011
12,8,3
75
4B
01001100
12,8,4
76
4C
<
(
01001101
12,8,5
77
40
+
01001110
12,8,6
78
4E
I (logical OR)
01001111
12,8,7
79
4F
01010000
12
80
5~
01010001
12,11,9,1
81
51
01010010
12,11,9,2
82
52
01010011
12,11,9,3
83
53
01010100
12,11,9~4
84
54
01010101
12,11,9~5
85
55
01010110
12,11,9,6
86
56
01010111
12,11~9_7
87
57
01011000
12,11~9~8
88
58
01011001
11,8,1
89
59
01011010
11,8,2
90
5A
01011011
11,8,3
91
5B
$
01011100
11,8,4
92
5C
•
01011101
11,8,5
93
50
01011110
11,8,6
94
5E
01011111
11,8,7
95
SF
-, (logical NOT)
01100000
11
96
60
- (hyphen)
01100001
0,1
97
61
/
01100010
11,0,9,2
98
62
0'1100011
11,0,9,3
99
63
01100100
11,0,9,4
100
64
01100101
11,0,9,5
101
65
01100110
11~0#9#6
102
66
01100111
11,0,9,7
103
67
01101000
11,0,9,8
104
68
01101001
0,8,1
105
69
01101010
12,11
106
6A
01101011
0,8,3
107
6B
, (comma)
L. _____________________________
.l. _________
.l. _________
.l. _________________
JI

,

108

r------------T-----------------T---------T---------T-----------------,
I System/360 I Character Set I
I
I
EBCDIC
I

Punch
I
I Hexa- I
Pr~nter
I
combination
I Decimal I Decimal I
Graphics
I
~------------+-----------------+---------+---------+-----------------~
011011QO
0,8,4
108
6C
i
01101101
0,8,5
109
6D
(underscore)
01101110
0.8,6
110
6E
>
?
01101111
0,8,7
111
6F
01110000
12,11.0
112
70
01110001
12.11.0,9,1
113
71
01110010
12,11,0,9,2
114
72
01110011
12,11,0,9,3
115
73
01110100
12,11,0,9,4
116
74
01110101
12,11,0,9,5
117
75
01110110
12,11,0,9,6
118
76
01110111
12,11,0,9,1
119
17
01111000
12,11,0,9,8
120
78
01111001
8,1
121
79
01111010
8,2
122
7A
01111011
8t 3
123
7B
01111100
8,4
124
1C
, (apostrophe)
01111101
8,5
125
7D
01111110
8,6
126
1E
=
II
01111111
8,7
121
7F
10000000
12,0,8,1
128
80
a
10000001
12,0,1
129
81
b
10000010
12,0,2
130
82
c
10000011
12,0,3
131
83
d
10000100
12,0,4
132
84
e
10000101
12,0,5
133
85
f
10000110
12,0,6
134
86
g
10000111
12,0,7
135
87
h
10001000
12,0,8
136
88
i
10001001
12,0,9
131
89
10001010
12,0,8,2
138
8A
10001011
12,0,8,3
139
8B
10001100
12,0,8,4
140
8C
10001101
12,0,8,5
141
80
10001110
12,0,8,6
142
8E
10001111
12,0,8,1
143
8F
10010000
12,11,8,1
144
90
j
10010001
12,11,1
145
91
k
10010010
12,11,2
146
92
1
10010011
12,11,3
147
93
rn
10010100
12,11,4
148
94
n
10010101
12,11,5
149
95
o
10010110
12,11,6
150
96
p
10010111
12,11,1
151
91
q
10011000
12,11,8
152
98
r
10011001
12,11,9
153
99
10011010
12,11,8,2
154
9A
10011011
12,11,8,3
155
9B
10011100
12,11,8,4
156
9C
10011101
12,11,8,5
157
90
10011110
12,11,8,6
158
9E
10011111
12,11,8,7
159
9F
10100000
11,0,8,1
160
AO
10100001
11,0,1
161
Al
10100010
11,0,2
162
A2
s
10100011
11,0,3
163
A3
t
10100100
11,0,4
164
A4
u

i 8-bit
I Code

I
I

------------~----------------_~

_________

~

_________

~

_________________ J

Appendix A:

Character Codes

109

r------------T-----------------T-'--------T--------T------'----------,
Character Set I
I
I
EBCDIC
I

I Systern/360 I
I
I 8-bi t
I Code
I

Punch
Combination

I
I Hexa- I
I Decimal I Decimal I

Printer
Graphics

I
I

~-,-----------+.-----------------+---------+---------+-----------------~

10100101
10100110
10100111
10101000
10101001
10101010
10101011
10101100
10101101
10101110
10101111
10110000
10110001
10110010
10110011
10110100
10110101

11,0,5
11,0,6
11,0,1
11,0,8
11,0,9
11,0,8,2
11,0,8,3
11,0,8,4
11,0,8,5
11,0,8,6
11,0,8,7
12,11,0,8,1
12,11~O,l

12,11,0,2
12,11,0,3
12,11,0,4
12,11,0,5
12,11,0,6
12,11,0,1
12,11,0,8
12,11,0,9
12,11,0,8,2
12,11,0,8,3

1011~110

10110111
10111000
10111001
10111010
10111011
10111100
10111101
10111110
10111111
11000000
11000001
11000010
11000011
11000100
11000101
11000110
11000111
11001000
11001001
11001010
11001011
11001100
11001101
11001110
11001111
11010000
11010061
11010010
11010011
11010100
11010101
11010110
11010111
11011000
11011001
11011010
11011011
11011100
L ____________
11011101

110

12~11,O#8,4

12,11,0,8,5
12,11,0,8,6
12,11,0,8,1
12,0
12,1
12,2
12,3
12,4
12,5
12,6
12,1
12,8
12,9
12,0,9,8,2
12,0,9,8,3
12,0,9.8,4
12,0,9#8,5
12,0,9,8,6
12,0,9,~,1

~

11,0
11,1
11,2
11,3
11,4
11,5
11,6
11,7
11,8
11,9
12,11,9,8,2
12,11,9.8,3
12,11,9,8,4
_________________
12,11,9,8,5

~

165
166
161
168
169
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
171
178
119
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
181
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
191
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
211
218
219
220
_________
221

~

A5
A6
A1
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
BO
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
CO
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C1
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
DO
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
06
01
08
D9
OA
DB
DC
_________
OD

v
w
x
Y
z

A
B
C
D
E

F
G

H
I

J
K

L

M

N
0

P
Q
R

~

________________ _

r------------T-----------------T---------T---------T-----------------,
Character Set I
I
I
EBCDIC
I

I System/360 I
I
I a-hit
I Code
I

Punch
I
I Hexa- I
Printer
I
Combination
I Decimal I Decimal I
Graphics
I
~------------+-----------------+---------+---------+-----------------i
I 11011110
12,11,9,8,6
222
DE
I 11011111
12,11,9,8,1
223
OF
I 11100000
0,8,2
224
EO
• 11100001
11,0,9,1
225
E1
11100010
0,2
226
E2
S
11100011
0,3
221
E3
T
11100100
0,4
228
E4
U
11100101
0,5
229
E5
V
11100110
0,6
230
E6
w
11100111
0,1
231
E1
X
11101000
0,8
232
E8
Y
11101001
0,9
233
E9
Z
11101010
11,0,9,8,2
234
EA
11101011
11,0,9,8,3
235
EB
11101100
11,0,9~8,4
236
EC
11101101
11,0,9,8,5
231
ED
11101110
11,0~9,8,6
238
EE
11101111
11,0,9,8,1
239
EF
11110000
0
240
FO
0
11110001
1
241
Fl
1
11110010
2
242
F2
2
11110011
3
243
F3
3
11110100
4
244
F4
4
11110101
5
245
F5
5
11110110
6
246
F6
6
11110111
1
241
F1
1
1~111000
8
248
F8
8
11111001
9
249
F9
9
11111010
12,11,0,9,8.2
250
FA
11111011
12,11,0,9,8,3
251
FB
111'11100
12, 11 , 0 , 9 , 8 , 4
252
FC
11111101
12,11,0,9,8,5
253
FD
11111110
12,11,0,9,8,6
254
FE
11111111
12,11,0,9,8~1
255
FF

------------~-----------------~---------~---------~-----------------

Special
¢

Gra~hic

Charac.ters

Cent Sign
Period, Decimal Point
Less-than Sign
Left Parenthesis
Plus Sign
Vertical Bar, Logical OR
Ampersand
Exclamation Point
Dollar Sign

<(
+
I
&
I

S

* Asterisk

) Right Parenthesis
; Semicolon

--, Logical NOT
Minus Sign, Hyphen
/ Slosh
, Comma
% Percent
Underscore

-

,
:

@
I

=

..

Colon
Number Sign
At Sign
Prime, Apostrophe
Equal Sign
Quotation Mark

-

Type

Bit Pattern
Bit Positions
01 234567

PF
%

Control Character
Special Graphic

00 00 0100
01 101100

R
a

Upper Case
Lower Case
Control Character,
function not yet
assigned

11 01 1001
10000001

Examples

Greater-than Sign
>? Question
Mark

00 11 0000

Hole Pattern
Zone Punches

1

Digit Punches

12 -9 - 4
0-8-4
I
11 - 9
I
12 -0 - 1
- I
12-11-0 -9 - 8 - 1
I

I

I

Appendix A:

Character Codes

III

APPENDIX B:

HEXADECIMAL-DECIMAL NUMBER CONVERSION TABLE

The table in this appendix provides for direct conversion
numbers in these ranges:

of

decimal

and

hexadecimal

r--------------T---------------,
Hexadecimal I
Decimal
I

I

~--------------+---------------i

I

I

I

l ______________
000 to FFF ~ ______________
0000 to 4095 J

Decimal numbers (0000-4095) are given within the 5-part table. The first two characters
(high-order) of hexadecimal numbers (OOO-FFF) are given in the lefthand column of the
table; the third character (x) is arranged across the top of each part of the table.
To find the decimal equivalent of the hexadecimal number OC9, look for OC in the left
column, and across that row under the column for x = 9. The decimal number is 0201.
To convert from decimal to hexadecimal, look up the decimal number within the table
and read the hexadecimal number by a combination of the hex characters in the left
column, and the value for x at the top of the column containing the decimal number. For
example, the decimal number 123 has the hexadecimal equivalent of, 07Bi the decimal
number 1478 has the hexadecimal equivalent of 5C6.
For numbers outside the range of the table"

add the following values to the table

r--------------T-----------,
Hexadecimal I Decimal I

I

~--------------+-----------i
1000
4096
2000
8192
3000
12288
4000
16384
5000
20~80
6000
24576
7000
28672
8000
32768
9000
36864
AOOO
40960
BOOO
45056
COOO
49152
0000
53248
EOOO
57344
______________
___________
J
FOOO
61440
~

Appendix B:

Hexadecimal-Decimal Number Conversion Table

113

0

'I

2

3

4

5.

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

OOx
01x
02x
03x

0000
0016
0032
0048

0001
0017
0033
0049

0002
0018
0034
0050

0003
0019
0035
0051

0004
0020
0036
0052

0005
0021
0037
0053

0006
0022
0038
0054

0007
0023
0039
0055

0008
0024
0040
0056

0009
0025
0041
0057

0010
0026
0042
0058

0011
0027
0043
0059

0012
0028
0044
0060

0013
0029
0045
0061

0014
0030
0046
0062

001~

04x
05x
06x
07x

0064
0080
0096
0112

0065
0081
0097
0113

0066
0082
0098
0114

0067
0083
0099
0115

0068
0084
0100
0116

0069
0085
0101
0117

0070
0086
0102
0118

0071
0087
0103
0119

0072
0088
0104
0120

0073
0089
0105
0121

0074
0090
0106
0122

0075
0091
0107
0123

0076
0092
010.8
0124

0077
0093
0109
0125

0078
0094
0110
0126

007'1

08x
09x
OAx
OBx

0128
0144
0160
0176

0129
0145
0161
0117

0130
0146
0162
0178

0'131
0147
0163
0179

0132
0148
01611
0180

0133
0149
0165
0181

0134
0150
0166
0182

0135
0151
0167
0183

0136
0152
0168
0184

0137
0153
0169
0185

0138
0154
0170
0186

0139
0155
0171
0187

0140
0156
0172
0188

0141
0157
On3
0189

0142
0158
0174
0190

01113
015)
0175
0191

OCx
ODx
OEx
OFx

0192
0208
0224
02160

0193
0209
0225
0241

0194
0210
0226
0242

0195
0211
0227
0243

0196
0212
0228
0244

0197
10213
0229
10245

0198
02111
0230
02116

0199
0215
0231
02117

0200
0216
0232
0248

0201
0217
0233
02169

0202
0218
02316
0250

0203
0219
0235
0251

0204
0220
0236
0252

0205
0221
0237
0253

0206
0222
0238
0254

0207
0223
0239
0255

lOx
llx
12x
13x

0256
0272
0288
0304

0257
0273
0289
0305

0258
0274
10290
0306

0259
0275
0291
0307

0260
0276
0292
0308

0261
0277
0293
0309

0262
0278
0294
0310

0263
0279
0295
0311

0264
0280
0296
0312

0265
0281
0297
0313

10266
0282
0298
0314

0267
0283
0299
0315

0268
0284
0300
0316

0269
0285
0301
0317

0270
0286
0302
0318

0271
0287
0303
0319

14x
15x
16x
17x

0320
0336
0352
0368

0321
0337
0353
0369

0322
0338
0354
0370

0323
0339
10355
0371

0324
0340
0356
0372

0325
03111
0357
0373

0326
03112
0358
03711

0327
03113
0359
0375

0328
03411
0360
0376

0329
0345
0361
0377

0330
03116
0362
0378

0331
03117
0363
0379

0332
03168
0364
0380

0333
03119
0365
0381

0334
0350
0366
0382

0335
0351
0367
0383

18x
I9x
lAx
'18x

0384
01100
01116
0432

0385
0401
011'17
01133

0386
0402
0418
01134

0387
0403
041!l
0435

0388
01104
0420
01636

0389
0405
10421
0437

0390
01106
01122
01138

0391
0407
0423
01139

0392
01108
04211
04110

0393
01109
0425
016161

0394
0410
01126
0442

0395
0411
01127
0443

0396
01112
01128
0444

0397
01113
0429
016165

0398
04111
0430
0446

0399
0415
01131
01647

lex
'lOx
1Ex
'IFx

0448
0464
0480
0496

0449
0465
0481
01197

01650
0466
0482
01698

0451
01167
0483
01699

0452
0468
0484
0500

0453
0469
01185
0501

0454
01170
0486
0502

0455
0471
0487
0503

0456
?472
0488
05011

0457
0473
0489
0505

01658
0474
01190
0506

0"59
01175
01191
0507

01160
01176
0492
0508

0461
01177
0493
0509

0462
0478
0494
0510

04H
04!J5
0511

20x
,21x
22x
:Ux

0512
0528
OS,..
0560

0513
0529
051&5
0561

P5U
0530
05116
0562

0515
0531
05"'7
0563

0516
0532
0548
056"

0517
0533
OS"
0565

0518
053"
0550
0566

0519
0535
0551
0567

0520
0536
0552
0568

0521
0537
0553
0569

0522
0538
05516
0570

0523
0539
0555
0571

05216
0540
0556
0572

0525
05111
0557
0573

0526
0542
05711

0527
054)
0559
0575

2"x
25x
26x
27x

0576
0592
0601.
062"

0577
0593
0609
0625

0578
059"
0610
0626

0579
0595
0611
0627

0580
0596
0612
0628

0581
0597
0613
10629

0582
0598
06111
0630

0583
0599
0615
0631

05811
0600
0616
0632

0585
0601
0617
0633

0586
0602
0618
0634

0587
0603
0619
0635

0588
060"
0620
0636

0589
0605
0621
0637

0590
0606
0622
0638

0591
0607
0623
0639

llx
29x
lAx
JBx

0640
10656
0688

06'"
0657
0673
0689

06112
0658
067"
0690

06U
0659
0675
0691

06"0660
0676
0692

06"5
0661
0677
0693

0646
0662
0678
06911

06117
0663
0679
0695

0648
06616
0680
0696

0649
0665
0681
0697

0650
0666
0682
0698

0651
0667
0683
0699

0652
0668
068"
0700

0653
0669
0685
0701

065"
0670
0686
0702

Ob55
0671
0687
0703

2ex
2Dx
2Ex
2h

070"
0720
0736
0752

0705
0721
0737
0753

0706
10722
0738
075_

0707
0723
0739
0755

0708
0724
07_0
0756

0709
0725
07'"
0757

0710
0726
07112
0758

0711
0727
07113
0759

0712
0728
074"
0760

0713
0729
07"5
0761

07111
0730
0746
0762

0715
0731
07117
0763

0716
0732
07168
07616

0717
0733
07169
0765

0718
07316
0750
0766

0719
0735
0751
0767

lOx
11x
12x
33x

0768
0784
0800
0816

0769
0785
0801
0817

0770
0786
0802
0818

0771
0787
0803
0819

0772
0788
080"
0820

0773
0789
0805
0821

077"
0790
0806
0822

0775
0791
0807
10823

0716
0792
0808
082"

0777
0793
0809
10825

0778
07916
0810
0826

0779
0795
0811
0827

0780
0796
0812
10828

0781
0797
0813
10829

0782
0798
08116
0830

0783
0799
0815
0831

lltx
35x
36x
llx

0832
.on8
08611
0180

0833
08"9
086S
0881

1083"
0850
0866
0882

10835
0851
0867
0883

0836
0852
0868
088"

10837
10853
10869
0885

0831
1085"
0870
0886

0839
10855
0871
0887

08160
0856
0872
0888

0841
0857
0873
0889

10842
0858
10874
08910

08163
0859
0875
0891

084_
0860
0876
0892

08165
0861
0877
0893

0846
0862
0878
0894

0847
0863
0819
0895

38x
39x

0896
0912
10928
109""

0897
0913
10929
09.5

0898
109111
09310
0946

0899
10915
10931
109117

0900
0916
0932
09U

0901
10917
0933
09"9

0902
10918
1093"
09510

0903
10919
10935
10951

0904
09210
10936
10952

0905
10921
10937
0953

0906
0922
10938
1095"

0907
10923
10939
0955

0908
0924
0940
0956

0909
0925
10941
0957

0910
0926
09162
10958

09"3
0959

109610
10976
0992
10108

0961
10977
10993
11009

10962
10978
09911
110110

10963
0979
10995
11011

09'"
109810
10996

0965
10981
10997
11013

0966
10982
10998

0967
10983
0999
11015

10968
1098"
101010
101.

0969
10915
1001
1017

10970
0986
110102
1011

0971
10987
110103
1019

10972
10988
1010"
10210

10973
0989
11005
1021

1097.
0990
11006
1022

10975
0991
110107
11023

X .a
r--

3Ax

3Bx
3ex
3Dx
3Ex
3Fx

114

0672

1012

lIOn

05~8

0031
00u7
OOO~

009~

0111
0127

01!6~

0911
0921

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

101t5
1061
1077

1030
10 .. 6
1062
1078

1031
10117
1063
1079

1032
10"8
106 ..
1080

1033
1049
1065
1081

1034
1050
1066
1082

1035
1051
1067
1083

1036
1052
1068
108"

1037
1053
1069
10115

1038
105..
1010
10b6

1039
1055
1071
1081

1092
1108
112"
l11t0

1093
1109
1125
lnl

109 ..
1110
1126
1'''2

1095
1111
1127
1143

1096
1112
1128
1144

1097
1113
1129
1145

1098
1""
1130
1, .. 6

1099
1115
1131
1, .. 7

1100
1116
1132
11118

1101
1111
1133
11119

1102
1118
1134
1150

1103
1119
1135
1151

1155
1171
1187
1203

1156
1172
1188
1204

1157
1173
1189
1205

1158
1174
1190
1206

1159
1175
1191
1201

1160
1176
1192
1208

1161
1117
1193
1209

1162
1178
119"
1210

1163
1119
1195
1211

116 ..
1180
1196
1212

1165
1181
1191
1213

1166
1182
1198
1214

1167
1183
1199
1215

1218
123 ..
1250
1266

1219
1235
1251
1267

1220
1236
1252
1268

1221
1237
1253
1269

1222
1238
1251t
1270

1223
1239
1255
1271

122"
12 .. 0
1256
1272

1225
12'"
1257
1273

1226
12"2
1258
1271t

1221
1243
1259
1275

1228
12 .. 4
1260
1276

1229
12 .. 5
1261
1277

1230
1246
1262
1218

1231
12'"
1263
1279

1281
1297
'313
1329

1282
1298
13111
1330

1283
1299
1315
1331

1281t
1300
1316
1332

1285
1301
1317
1333

1286
1302
1318
133 ..

1287
1303
1319
1335

1288
130_
1320
1336

1289
1305
1321
1337

1290
1306
1322
1338

1291
1307
1323
1339

'292
1308
1324
13_0

1293
1309
1325
13111

,294
1310
1326
1342

1295
1311
1327
13113

13 .. 1t
1360
1376
1392

131115
1361
1377
1393

13 .. 6
1362
1378
139.

13 .. 7
1363
1379
1395

13 .. 8
136_
1380
1396

13 .. '
1365
1381
1397

1350
1366
1382
1398

1351
1367
1383
1399

1352
1368
138_
, .. 00

1353
1369
1385
, .. 0,

135..
1370
1386
, .. 02

1355
1371
1387
11103

1356

1357
1373
1389
, .. 05

1358
137_
1390
, .. 06

1359
1375
1391
11107

11108
1112"
l1t1110
,.56

11109
'''25
11t1111
'''57

, .. ,0
11126
l1t1t2
11158

'5 It 11
,.27
, .... 3
llt59

''''2
"'28
lit l1li
,..60

111113
11129
1l1li5
l1t61

,.,5
1431
''''7
111163

''''6
11132
lU8
,..6 ..

, .. 11
1433
1lilt 9
, .. 65

11118
lUll
, .. 50
, .. 66

,..,9
, .. 35
1451
11167

1420
11136
11152
, .. 68

11121

111 .. 6
11162

'453
11169

11122
11138
, .. 511
1470

11123
, .. 39
1455
11171

1It72

llt73
'1505
_89

,.75
1491
1507
1523

llt76
'''92
1508
152"

'_77
, .. 93
1509
1525

,.78
l1t9.
1510
1526

,.79
,.95
1511
1527

'''80
, .. 96
1512
1528

' .. 81
11197
1513
1529

'482
, .. 98
151 ..
1530

'''83
''''9
1515
1531

,.84
1500
1516
1532

, .. 85
1501
1511
1533

11186
1502
1518
153"

'''87
1503
1519
1535

0

1

2

3

4

5

"Ox
Il1x
1t2x
"3x

102"
10 .. 0
1056
1072

1025
,0 .. ,
1057
1073

1026
10"2
1058
107 ..

1027
10 .. 3
1059
1075

1028
10....
1060
1076

.... x
1t5x
"6x
1t7x

1088
110 ..
1120
1136

1089
1105
1121
1131

1090
1106
1122
1138

1091
1101
1123
1139

"8x
Ux
IIIAx
IIIBx

1152
1168
118 ..
1200

1153
1169
1185
1201

115 ..
1170
1186
1202

"Cx
IIIDx
ItBx
IIIPx

1216
1232
12 .. 8
1264

1217
1233
12_9
1265

SOx
51x
52x
53x

1280
1296
1312
1328

5ltx
55x
56x
57x
58x

x •

5'-

SAx
58x

10~9

,11130
.. ,..

137~

1388
, .. 011

lit 37

5Px

150.
1520

1521

'_711
, .. 90
1506
1522

60x
61x
62x
63x

1536
1552
1568
15811

1537
1553
1569
1585

1538
1554
1570
1586

1539
1555
1571
1587

1540
1556
1572
1588

1541
1557
1573
1589

1542
1558
15711
1590

1543
1559
1575
1591

15 .. 4
1560
1576
1592

1545
1561
1577
1593

1546
1562
1578
1594

1547
1563
1579
1595

1548
1564
1580
1596

1549
1565
1581
1591

1550
1566
1582
1598

1 ~51
1567
1583
1599

64x
65x
66x
67x

1600
1616
1632
1648

1601
1617
1633
1649

1602
·1618
1634
1650

1603
1619
1635
1651

1604
1620
1636
1652

1605
1621
1637
1653

1606
1622
1638
1654

1607
1623
1639
1655

1608
1624
1640
1656

1609
1625
1641
1657

1610
1626
1642
1658

1611
1627
16113
1659-

1612
1628
1644
1660

1613
1629
1645
1661

1614
1630
1646
1662

1615
1631
1647
1663

68x
69x
6Ax
6Bx

1664
1680
1696
1112

1665
1681
1697
1713

1666
1682
1698
1714

1661
16"83
1699
1115

1668
1684
1700
1716

1669
1685
1101
1711

1670
1686
1102
1118

1671
1687
1703
1719

1672
1688
1704
1720

1673
1689
1105
1721

1674
1690
1706
1722

1675
1691
1107
1723

1616
1692
1108
1124

1677
1693
1109
1725

1618
1694
1710
1726

1679
1695
1111
1727

6Cx
6Dx
6Ex
6Fx

1128
1144
1160
1176

1729
1745
1761
1777

1730
1746
1762
1178

1731
1741
1763
1779

1732
1748
1764
1780

1733
17 .. 9
1765
1781

1734
1750
1766
1782

1735
1751
1767
1783

1136
1752
1168
1184

1131
1753
1769
1785

1738
1754
1170
1786

1739
1155
1111
1187

1740
1156
1712
1788

17111
1751
1113
1189

1742
1758
1714
1790

11113
1159
1775
1791

70x
71x
72'x
73x

1792
1808
1824
1840

1793
1809
1825
1841

1794
1810
1826
1842

1795
1811
1827
1843

179 6
1812
1828
1844

1797
1813
1829
1845

1798
1814
1830
1846

1799
1815
1831
18"7

1800
1816
1832
18 .. 8

1801
1811
1833
1849

1802
1818
1834
1850

1803
1819
1835
1851

1804
1820
1836
1852

1805
1821
1837
1853

1806
1822
1838
1854

1807
11123
1839
11155

74x
75x
76x
77x

1856
1872
1888
1904

1857
1873
1889
1905

1858
1874
1890
1906

1859
1875
1891
1907

1860
1876
1892
1908

1861
1877
1893
1909

1862
1878
1894
1910

1863
1879
1895
1911

1864
1880
1896
1912

1865
1881
1897
1913

1866
1882
1898
1914

1867
1883
1899
1915

1868
1884
1900
1916

1869
1885
1901
1911

1870
18d6
1902
1918

1811
1887
1903
1919

78x
79x
7Ax
78x

1920
1936
1952
1968

1921
1937
1953
1969

1922
1938
1954
1970

1923
1939
1955
1971

1924
1940
1956
1972

1925
1941
1957
1973

1926
1942
1958
1974

1927
1943
1959
1975

1928
1944
1960
1976

1929
1945
1961
1977

1930
1946
1962
1978

1931
1941
1963
1979

1932
1948
1964
1980

1933
1949
1965
1981

1934
1950
1966
1982

1935
1951
1967
1983

7Cx
7Dx
7Ex
7Px

198"
2000
2016
2032

1985
2001
2017
2033

1986
2002
2018
2034

1987
2003
2019
2035

1988
2004
2020
2036

1989
2005
2021
2037

1990
2006
2022
2038

1991
2007
2023
2039

1992
2008
202"
201110

1993
2009
2025
20'"

1994
2010
2026
2042

1995
2011
2027
20"3

1996
2012
2028
20 .. 4

1997
2013
2029
20.5

1998
2014
2030
20 .. 6

1999
2015
2031
2041

SCx
SOx
SEx

U88

Appendix B:

Hexadecimal-Decimal Number Conversion Table

115

x •

"
20118

1

2

3

16

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

205 ..
2010
2086
2102

2055
2071
2081
2103

2056
2012
2088
210 ..

2051
2013
2089
2105

2058
201 ..
2090
2106

2059
2075
2091
2101

2060
2016
2092
2108

2061
2011
2093
2109

2062
2018
2094
2110

2063
2019
2095
2111

20611
2080
2096

20 .. 9
2065
2081
2091

2050
2066
2082
2098

2051
2067
2083
2099

2052
2068
208"
2100

2053
2069
2085
2101

a.x

2112
2128
211616
2160

2113
2129
21lt5
2161

2114
2130
2146
2162

2115
2131
21161
2163

2116
2132
2148
21611

2111
2133
21 .. 9
2165

2118
2134
2150
2166

2119
2135
2151
2167

2120
2136
2152
2168

2121
2131
2153
2169

2122
2138
21516
2170

2123
2139
2155
2111

2124
2140
2156
2112

2125
2141
2157
2113

2126
21162
2158
21116

2121
2143
2159
2115

88x
89x
8Bx

2116
2192
2208
22216

2171
2193
2209
2225

2118
21916
2210
2226

2119
2195
2211
2227

2180
2196
2212
2228

2181
2197
2213
2229

2182
2198
221.
2230

2183
21"
2215
2231

2181t
2200
2216
2232

2185
2201
2211
2233

2186
2202
2218
223 ..

2181
2203
2219
2235

2188
2201t
2220
2236

2189
2205
2221
2237

2190
2206
2222
2238

2191
2201
2223
2239

ICx
8Dx
8Ex
.rx

22160
2256
2272
2288

22 •.1
2251
2213
2289

22"2
2258
221"
2290

22U
2259
2215
2291

22 ....
2260
2276
2292

22 .. 5
2261
2277
2293

22116
2262
2218
22911

22U
2263
2219
2295

2248
2264
2280
2296

221t9
2265
2281
2297

2250
2266
2282
2298

2251
2261
2283
2299

2252
2268
22816
2300

2253
2269
2285
2301

2254
2270
2286
2302

2255
2211
2287
2303

90x
91x
92x
93x

230 ..
2320
2336
2352

2305
2321
2337
2353

2306
2322
2338
235 ..

2307
2323
2339
2355

2308
232"
23 .. 0
2356

2309
2325
23 .. ,
2357

2310
2326
23 .. 2
2358

2311
2321
231t3
2359

2312
2328
2344
2360

2313
2329
23165
2361

23116
2330
23166
2362

2315
2331
23167
2363

2316
2332
2348
23616

2317
2333
2349
2365

2318
233 ..
2350
2366

2319
2335
2351
2361

'''x
95x
fix
t7x

2368
238 ..
2 .. 00
2 .. ,6

2369
2385
2.. 01
2.,17

2370
2386
2 .. 02
2",8

2371
2387
2403
2""

2372
2388
2"0"·
2"20

2313
2389
2405
21621

2314
2390
2"06
2"22

2315
2391
2"07
2"23

2316
2392
2408
2112"

2377
2393
2409
2lt25

2318
2391t
2ltl0
2"26

2319
2395
21t"
2"21

2380
2396
2"'2
21128

2381
2397
2413
2"29

2382
2398
2414
2430

2383
2399
2"'5
21131

2"32
2U8
2U ..
2UO

2U3
21649
2U5
21181

243 ..
21150
21166
2"'2

21t35
2"51
2"67

2U7
2lt53
2469
2lt85

2U8
2lt5"
21170
21186

21139
21155
2.. 71
21187

2""0
2lt56
21172
21688

2ltlll
2 .. 51
2",3
2"89

2""2
21658
2111 ..
21190

211113
2459

21617

2491

24 ....
2460
2U6
21t92

2 .... 5
2lt61

21683

2U6
21t52
2 .. 68
2"8"

2..,3

2""6
21162
2.. 78
2"'''

21147
21663
21679
21695

trx

2 .. 96
2512
2528
25 ....

211197
2513
2529
251t5

21198
25111
2530
251t6

2,.,9
2515
2531
25..,

2500
2516
2532
25 ...

2501
2511
2533
25..,

2502
2518
25316
2550

2503
2519
2535
2551

250 ..
2520
2536
2552

2505
2521
2531
2553

2506
2522
2538
255 ..

2507
2523
2539
2555

2508
252"
25.. 0
2556

2509
2525
25111
2557

2510
2526
25lt2
2558

AOx
A1x
A2x
A3x

2560
2576
2592
2608

2561
2577
2593
2609

2562
2578
259"
2610

2563
2519
2595
2611

25611
2580
2596
2612

2565
2581
2597
2613

2566
2582
2598
26111

2567
2.583
2599
2615

2568
2581t
2600
2616

2569
2585
2601
2611

2570
2586
2602
2618

2571
2587
2603
2619

2572
2588
260"
2620

2573
2589
2605
2621

25716
2590
2606
2622

2575
2591
2601
2623

A.. x
A5x
A6x
A1x

262"
2640
2656
2672

2625
26'"
2657
2673

2626
26"2
2658
267 ..

2621
26U
2659
2615

2628
2611"
2660
2616

2629
26 .. 5
2661
2677

2630
26116
2662
2678

2631
26ft 7
2663
2619

2632
26 .. 8
266 ..
2680

2633
26.9
2665
2681

263 ..
2650
2666
2682

2635
2651
2667
2681

2636
2652
2668
26816

2637
2653
2669
2685

2638
26516
2670
2686

2639
2655
2b71
2687

A8x
A9x

2688
270 ..
2720
2736

2689
2705
2721
2737

2690
2106
2722
2738

2691
2107
2723
2739

2692
2708
272"
27160

2693
2709
2725
2741

269"
2710
2726
27112

2695
2711
2127
27163

2696
2712
2728
211616

2697
2713
2729
27165

2698
271 ..
2730
27 .. 6

2699
2715
27312747

2180
2716
2732
27118

2701
2717
2733
27169

2702
2718
273 ..
2750

2703
2719
2735
2751

Arx

2752
2768
27816
2800

2753
2769
2785
2801

2754
2770
2786
2802

2755
2771
2761
2803

2756
2772
2788
2804

2757
2773
2789
"2805

2758
27716
2790
2806

2759
2775
2791
2807

2760
2776
2792
2808

2761
2777
2793
2809

2762
2778
279 ..
2810

2763
2779
2795
2811

276"
2780
2796
2812

'2765
2781
2797
2813

2766
2782
2798
281"

2767
2783
2799
2815

BOx
B1x
B2x
B3x

2816
2832
28118
216.

281 7
2833
28"9
2865

2818
2831t
2850
2866

28'9
2835
2851
2867

2820
2836
2852
2868

2821
2837
2853
2869

2~22

2838
28516
2870

2823
2839
2855
2871

2824
28 .. 0
2856
2872

2825
2841
2857
2873

2826
2842
2858
287.

2827
28113
2859
2875

2828
28 ....
2860
2876

2829
2845
2861
2877

2830
28166
2862
2878

2831
28167
2863
2 £.79

Bllx
B5x
B6x
B7x

2880
2896
2912
2928

2881
2897
2913
2929

2882
2898
29116
2930

2883
2899
2915
2931

288"
2900
2916
2932

2885
2901
2917
2933

2886
2902
2918
293"

2887
2903
2919
2935

2888
290.
2920
2936

2889
2905
2921
2937

2890
2906
2922
2938

2891
2907
2923
2939

2892
2908
29216
29.0

2893
2909
2925
29'"

2894
2910
2926
29162

2895
2911
2927
29163

.Bx

29 ....
2960
2976
2992

2945
2961
29"17
2993

29 .. 6
2962
2978
299"

29"7
2963
2979
2995

29168
2964
2980
2996

2'.9
2965
2981
2997

2950
2966
2982
2998

2951
2967
2983
2999

2952
2968
298.
3000

2953
2969
2985
3001

295 ..
2970
2986
3002

2955
2971
2987
3003

2956
2972
2988
30016

2957
2973
2989
3005

2958
2972990
3006

2959
2975
2991
3007

BCx
BDx
.Ex
Ux

3008
3024
30 .. 0
3056

3009
3025
30'"

3010
3026
3042
3058

3011
3027
30 .. 3
3059

3012
3028
304 ..
3060

3013
3029
30 .. 5
3061

3014
3030
3046
3062

3015
3031
30167
3063

3016
3032
30"8
306.

3017
3033
30119
3065

3018
3034
3050
3066

3019
3035
3051
3067

3020
3036
3052
3068

3021
3037
3053
3069

302~.

3038
3054
3070

3023
3039
3055
3071

lOx
11x
82x
83x
85x
86x
81x

SAx

tax
99x
9Ax

tax
9Cx
fOx
tb

AAx

ABx
ACx
ADx
Ux

_ex
.9x
&Ax

116

3057

21115

2511
2527
25163

2559

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

3073
3089
3105
3121

3074
3090
3106
3122

3075
3091
3107
3123

3076
3092
3108
3124

3077
3093
3109
3125

3078
3094
3110
3126

3079
3095
3111
3127

3080
3096
3112
3128

3081
3097
3113
3129

3082
3098
3114
3130

3083
3099
3115
3131

3084
3100
3116
3132

juO;)

3088
3104
3120

3101
3117
3133

J086
3102
3118
3134

3087
3103
3119
3135

C4x
C5x
C6x
C7'x

3136
1152
3168
3184

3137
3153
3169
3185

3138
3154
3170
3186

3139
3155
3171
3187

3140
3156
3172
3188

3141
3157
3173
3189

3142
3158
3174
3190

3143
3159
3175
3191

3144
3160
3176
3192

3145
3161
3177
3193

3146
3162
3178
3194

3147
3163
3179
3195

3148
3164
3180
3196

3149
3165
3181
3197

3150
3166
3182
3198

3151
3167
3183
3199

C8x
C9x
CAx
CBx

3200
3216
3232
3248

3201
3217
3233
3249

3202
3218
3234
3250

3203
3219
3235
3251

3204
3220
3236
3252

3205
3221
3237
3253

3206
3222
3238
325_

3207
3223
3239
3255

3208
322..
3240
3256

3209
3225
32_'
3257

3210
3226
3242
3258

3211
3227
32 .. 3
3259

3212
3228
324_
3260

3213
3229
3245
3261

3214
3230
32166
3262

3215
3231
32 .. 7
3263

CCx
CDx
CEx
CFx

3264
3280
3296
3312

3265
3281
3297
3313

3266
3282
3298
33,..

3267
3283
3299
3315

3268
3284
3300
3316

3269
3285
3301
3317

3270
3286
3302
3318

3271
3281
3303
3319

3272
3288
3320

3273
3289
3305
3321

327_
3290
3306
3322

3275
3291
3307
3323

3276
3292
3308
3324

3277
3293
3309
3325

3278
3294
3310
3326

3279
3295
3311
3327

DOx
Dlx
D2x
D3x

3328
3344
3360
3376

3329
3345
3361
3377

3330
3346
3362
3378

3331
3347
3363
3379

3332
33118
336_
3380

3333
3349
3365
3381

3334
3350
3366
3382

3335
3351
3367
3383

3336
3352
3368
3384

3337
3353
3369
3385

3338
33516
3370
3386

3339
3355
3371
3387

33 .. 0
3356
3372
3388

3341
3357
3373
3389

3342
3358
3374
3390

33163
3359
3375
3391

D4x
D5x
D6x
D7x

3392
3408
3112"
3UO

3393
3409
3425
31tltl

3394
3410
3426
3442

3395
3.. 11
3427
3U3

3396
31.,2
3428
3444

3397
3"'3
31t29
3445

3398
3 .. ".
3430
3446

3399
3_,5
31131
31t1t7

3400
3_,6
31132
31148

3401
3_17
3433
3449

3402
31.,8
31t34
345O

3403
31.,9
3"35
31t51

3404
3420
3436
3_52

3405
3421
3437
34·53

3406
3422
3438
3454

3407
3423
3439
3455

D8x
D9x
DAx
DBx

3_56
3_72
3U8
3501t

3_57
3473
3489
3505

3458
3474
3490
3506

3459
3475
3491
3507

3UO
3476
3_92
3508

3461
3477
3.. 93
3509

31t62
31178
31t9_
3510

3463
31t79
3495
3511

3464
3UO
3496
3512

3465
3481
3497
3513

3466
3482
3498
3514

3U7
3483
3499
3515

3U8
3484
3500
3516

3469
3485
3501
3517

3470
3486
3502
3518

3471
3487
3503
3519

DCx
DDx
DEx
DFx

3520
3536
3552
3568

3521
3537
3553
3569

3522
3538
3554
3570

3523
3539
3555
3571

3521t
354O
1556
3572

3525
35.. ,
3557
3573

3526
35_2
3558
357_

3527
35113
3559
3575

3528
3544
3560
3576

3529
3545
3561
3577

3530
35U
3562
3578

3531
3547
3563
3579

3532
35168
3564
3580

3533
35 .. 9
3565
3581

3534
3550
3566
35112

3535
3551
3567
3583

EOx
Elx
E2x
E3x

)584
3600
3616
3632

3585
3601
3617
3633

3586
3602
3618
3634

3587
3603
3619
3635

3588
3604
3620
3636

3589
3605
3621
3637

3590
3606
3622
3638

3591
3607
3623
3639

3592
3608
3624
3640

3593
3609
3625
36ft 1

3594
3610
3626
3642

3595
3611
3627
3643

3596
3612
3628
36164

3597
3613
3629
3645

3598
3614
3630
36166

3599
3615
3631
3647

E4x
E5x
E6x
E7x

3U8
366_
3680
3696

3649
3665
3681
3.697

3650
3666
3682
3698

31»51

3667
3683
3699

3652
3668
3684
3700

3653
3669
3685
3701

3654
3670
3686
3702

3655
3671
3687
3703

3656
3672
3688
3704

3657
3673
3689
3705

3658
3674
3690
3706

3659
3675
3691
3707

3660
3676
3692
3708

3661
3677
3693
370Q

3662
3678
3694
1710

36&3
3679
3&95
3711

E8x
E9x
EAx
EBx

3712
3728
3144
3760

3713
3729
3745
3761

3714
3730
3746
3762

3715
3731
3747
3763

3716
3732
3748
3764

3717
3733
3749
3765

3718
3734
3750
3766

3719
3735
3751
3767

3720
3736
3752
3768

3721
3737
3753
3169

3722
3738
3754
3770

3723
3739
3755
3771

37216
3140
3156
3772

3725
3141
3751
3773

37:"
3742
3758
3774

3727
3143
3759
3175

ECx
£Ox
EEx
EFx

3776
3792
3808
3824

3777
3793
3809
3825

3778
3794
3810
3826

3779
3795
3811
3827

3780
3796
3812
3828

3781
3197
3813
3829

3782
3798
l814
3830

3783
31.99
3815
3831

378..
3800
3816
3832

3785
3801
3817
3833

3786
3802
3818
3834

3787
3803
3819
3835

3788
3804
3820
3836

3789
3805
3821
3831

3790
3806
3822
3838

3191
31107
3823
31139

FOx
Flx
F2x
F3x

3840
3856
3872
3888

3841
3857
3873
3889

3842
3858
3874
3890

3843
3859
3875
3891

3844
3860
3876
3892

3845
3861
3877
3893

3846
3862
3878
3894

3847
3863
3879
3895

3848
3864
3880
3896

3849
3865
3881
3897

3850
3866
3882
3898

3851
3867
3883
3899

3852
3868
3884
3900

3853
3869
3885
3901

3854
3810
38116
3902

38S5
3a71
3tHI1
3903

F4x
F5x
F6x
F7x

3904
3820
3936
3952

3905
3921
3937
3953

3906
3922
3938
395..

3907
3923
3939
3955

3908
3924
3940
3956

3909
3925
39ltl
3957

3910
3926
39"2
3958

3911

39.. 3
3959

3912
3928
39 ....
3960

3913
3929
3945
3961

3914
3930
3946
3962

3915
3931
39 .. 7
3963

3916
3932
391t8
3964

3917
3933
3949
3965

3918
3934
3950
3966

3919
3935
3951
3967

F8x
F9x
FAx
FBx

3968
3984
_000
4016

3969
3985
4001
4017

3970
3986
4002
4018

3971
3987
4003
4019

3972
3988
16001t
16020

3973
3989
4005
4021

3974
3990
4006
16022

3975
3991
4007
4023

3976
3992
16008
4024

3977
3993
_009
4025

3978
3994
401O
4026

3979
3995
4011
4027

3980
3996
4012
4028

3981
3997
4013
4029

39&2
3998
.. 0116
4030

3983
3999
.. 015
4031

FCx
FDx
FEx
FFx

4032
4048
4064
4080

4033
4049
4065
4081

.. 034
4050
4066
4082

4035
4051
4067
4083

4036
4052
4068
4084

4037
4053
4069
4085

4038
4054
16070
4086

4039
.. 055
4071
4087

404O
.. 056
4072
4088

4041
4057
4073
4089

40"2
4058
4074
4090

16043
4059
4075
4091

4044
4060
4076
4092

4045
4061
4077
4093

4046
4062
4078
409_

4047
4063
4079
4095

x COx
Clx
C2x
C3x

°
3072

Appendix B:

3~27

330 ..

Hexadecimal-Decimal Number Conversion Table

117

APPENDIX C:

BASIC MACHINE FORMAT

8
4
Operation
Code
Rl

4

ASSEMBLER OPERAND
FIELD FORMAT

MACHINE-INSTRUCTION FORMAT

APPLICABLE INSTRUCTIONS

Rl,R2

All RR instructions
except BCR,SPM,
and SVC

Ml,R2

BCR

Rl

SPM

I
(See Notes 1,6,8,
and 9)

SVC

R2

RR
4
8
Operation
Code
Ml

4

R2

8
4
Operation
Rl
Code

8
Operation
Code

RX

8
I

4-

4

12

Rl,D2(X2,B2)

X2

B2

D2

Rl,S2(X2)
Rl,S2

4

4

12

X2

B2

D2

Ml,D2(X2,B2)
Ml,D2(,B2)
Ml,S2(X2)
Ml,S2
(See Notes 1,6,8,
and 9)

4

4

12

~3

B2

D2

4
8
Operation
Rl
Code

4

4

12

B2

D2

4
8
Operation
Rl
Code

4

4

12

4
8
Operation
Code
Rl

4
8
Operation
Code
Ml

8
4
Operation
Code
Rl

Rl,D~(,B2)

-------- ----

All RX instructions
except BC

BC

Rl,R3,D2(B2)
Rl,R3,S2

BXH,BXLE,LM,STM,LCL,STCL

Rl,D2(B2)
Rl,S2

All shift instructions

Rl,M3,D2(B2)
Rl,M3,S2
(See Notes 1-3,7,
8,and 9)

ICM,STCM,CLM

RS

M3" B2

D2

Appendix C:

Machine-Instruction Format

119

~-r--------------------------------~-------------------------,-"---------------------------------~

BASIC MACHINE FORMAT

ASSEMBLER OPERAND
FIELD FORMAT

~-+---------------------I-"--.----------""----

8
8
Operation
Code
12

4

12

Bl

Dl(B1) ,12
Sl,I2

Dl

APPLICABLE INSTRUCTIONS
.-----

All SI instructions
except those listed
for other SI formats

S1
8
Operation
Code

'--------_.....

J:bJ

Dl (Bl)
Sl
(See Notes 2,3,6,
7,8 and 10)

LPSW,SSM,TIO,TCH,TS

~-~---------------------------------+--------------------r-------'--------------------------~

l6~12

Two-byte
Operation
Code

S

Bl

Dl
Sl

Dl

(B1)

(See Notes 2,
3,and 7)

SCK,STCK,STIPD,SIOF,STIDC,
SIO, IHO, HDV
SCKC,STCKC,SPT,STPT,PTLB,
RRB

1--------------------+-------,--------1"---'"----,------------8

4

4

12

4

Operatior
Code
Ll L2 Bl

4

12

Dl B2

D2

Dl(Ll,Bl) ,D2(L2,B2)
Sl (Ll) ,S2 (L2)

PACK,UNPK,MVO,AP,
CP,DP,MP,SP,ZAP

Dl(L,Bl) ,D2(B2)

NC,OC,XC,CLC,MVC,MVN,
MVZ,TR,TRT,ED,EDMK

SS

8
Operation
Code

ope~ation 4
Code

No~es

8

4

L

Bl Dl

B2 D2

4

4

4

12

Ll 13 Bl

12

4

12

TUl

D~_~l~J

Sl(L) ,52

Dl(Ll,Bl) ,D2(B2),n
Sl(Ll),S2,I3
Sl, S2, 13
(See Notes 2,3,5,6,
7 and 10)

SRP

for Appendix C:

1.

Rl, R2, and R3 are absolute expressions that specify general or floating-point registers. The general register numbers are 0 through 15; floating-point register numbers are 0, 2, 4, and 6.

2.

Dl and D2 are absolute expressions that specify displacements.
may be specified.

3.

Bl and B2 are absolute expressions that specify base registers.
o - 15.

4.

X2 is an absolute expression that specifies an index register.
o - 15.

5.

L, Ll, and L2 are absolute expressions that specify field lengths. An L expression
can specify a value of 1 - 256. Ll and L2 expressions can specify a value of 1 - 16.
In all cases, the assembled value will be one less than the specified value.

6.

I, 12, and 13 are absolute expre~sions that provide immediate data.
and 12 may be 0 - 255. 'rhe value of 13 may be 0 - 9.

7.

Sl and S2 are absolute or relocatable expressions that specify an address.

S.

RR, RS, and S1 instruction fields that are blank under BASIC MACHINE FORMAT are not
examined during instruction execution. The fields are not written in the symbolic
operand, but are assembled as binary zeros.

9.

Ml and M3 specify a 4-bit mask.

A value of 0 - 4095
Register numbers are
Register numbers are

The value of I

10. In IBM System/370 the SIO, HIO, HDV and SIOF operation codes occupy one byte and the
low order bit of the second byte.
In all other systems the HIO and SIO operation
codes occupy only the first byte of the instruction.

120

Appendix D. Machine Instruction Mnemonic Operation Code.

This appendix contains two tables of the mnemonic operation codes for all machine
instructions that can be represented in assembler language, including extended
mnemonic operation codes.
The first table is in alphabetic order by instruction. The second table is in numeric
order by operation code.
In the first table is indicated: both the mnemonic and machine operation codes,
explicit and implicit operand formats, program interruptions possible, and condition
code set.
The column headings in the first table and the information each column provides follow:
Instruction: This column contains the name of the instruction associated with the
mnemonic operation code.
Mnemonic Operation Code: This column contains the mnemonic operation code for the machine
instruction. This is written in the operation field when coding the instruction.
Machine Operation Code: This column contains the hexadecimal equivalent of the actual
machine operation code. The operation code will appear in this form in most storage
dumps and when displayed on the system control panel. For extended mnemonics, this
column also contains the mnemonic code of the instruction from which the extended
mnemonic is derived.
Operand Format: This column shows the symbolic format of the operand field in both
explicit and implicit form. For both forms, R1, R2, and R3 indicate general registers
in operands one, two, and three respectively. X2 indicates a general register used as
an index register in the second operand. Instructions which require an index register
~2)
but are not to be indexed are shown with a 0 replacing X2. L, L1, and L2 indicate
lengths for either operand, operand one, or operand two respectively. M1 and ~3 indicate
a 4-bit mask in operand one and three, respectively. 1, 12, and 13 indicate immediate
da ta eight bi ts long (1 and 12) or four bits long (13) •
For the explicit format, 01 and 02 indicate a displacement and B1 and B2 indicate a
base register for operands one and two.
For the implicit format, 01, E1, and 02, B2 are replaced by S1 and S2 which indicate
a storage address in operands one and two.
Type of Instruction: This column gives the basic machine format of the instruction ~,
RX, SI, or SS). If an instruction is included in a special feature or is an extended
mnemonic, this is also indicated.

Program Interruptions Possible: This column indicates the possible program interruptions
for this instruction. The abbreviations used are: A - Addressing, S - Specification,
OV - OVerflow, P - Protection, Op - Operation (if feature is not installed), and Other
- other interruptions which are listed. The type of overflow is indicated by: 0 Decimal, E - Exponent, or F - Fixed Point.
Condition Code Set: The condition codes set as a resUlt of this instruction are indicated
in this column. (See legend following the table.)

Appendix D: Machine Instruction Mnemonic Operation Codes

121

r--

Instruction

Add
Add
Add Decimal
Add Ha Ifword
Add Logical

Mnemonic
Operotion
Code

Machine
Operation
Code

Operand Format
Explicit

Implicit

A
AR
AP
AH
AL

SA
IA
FA
4A
5E

RI,D2(X2,B2) or RI, D2(,B2)
RI,R2
DI (L I, BI), D2(L2, B2)
RI, D2(X2, B2)or RI, D2(, B2)
RI, D2(X2, B2)or RI, D2(, B2)

Add Logical

ALR

IE

RI,R2

Add Normalized, Extended

AXR

36

RI,R2

Add
Add
Add
Add

Normal ized, Long
Norma Iized, Long
Normalized, Short
Norma Iized, Short

AD
ADR
AE
AER

6A

2A
7A
3A

RI, D2(X2, B2)or RI, D2(, B2)
RI,R2
RI, D2(X2, B2)or RI, D2(, B2)
RI,R2

Add
Add
Add
Add
And

Unnormal ized, Long
Unnormalized,Long
Un normal ized, Short
Unnormol ized, Short
Logical

AW
AWR
AU
AUR
N

6E
2E
7E
3E
54

RI, D2(X2,B2)or RI, D2(,B2)
RI,R2
RI, D2(X2, B2)or RI, D2(, B2)
RI,R2
RI, D2(X2, B2)or RI, D2(, B2)

And Logical
And Logical
And Logical Immediate

NC
NR
NI

D4
14
94

DI (L, BI), D2(B2)
RI,R2
DI (BI ),12

SI(L), S2 or 51, S2

Branch and link
Branch and Link

BAL
BAlR

45
05

RI,D2(X2,B2)ar RI,D2(,B2)
RI, R2

RI,S2(X2)or R1, S2

Branch
Branch
Branch
Branch
Branch

BC
BCR
BCT
BCTR
BE

47
07
46
06
47(BC 8)

M I, D2(X2, B2) or M I, D2(, B2)
MI,R2
RI,D2(X2, B2)or RI, D2(,B2)
RI, R2
D2(X2, B2) or D2(, B2)

MI,52(X2)or MI,S2

52(X2) or 52

Branch on High

BH

47(BC 2)

D2(X2, B2) or D2(, B2)

52(X2) or 52

Branch in Index High
Branch on Index low or Equal
Bmnch on low

BXH
BXlE
Bl

86
87
47(BC 4)

. RI, R3, D2(B2)
RI,R3,D2(B2)
D2(X2, B2) or D2(, B2)

RI,R3,52
RI,R3,52
52(X2) or 52

Branch if Mixed

BM

47(BC 4)

D2(X2,B2)or D2(,B2)

52(X2) or 52

on
on
on
on
on

Condition
Condition
Count
Count
Equal

RI, S2(X2) or RI,52
SI (L I), S2(L2) or 51, S2
RI, S2 (X2 lor R1,52
RI, 52(X2)or R1,52

RI, S2(X2)or R1,52
RI,S2(X2)orR 1,52

RI,52(X2)or R1,52
RI, 52 (X2)or R1,52
RI, S2(X2)or R1,52

51,12

RI,52(X2)or R1,52

Branch on Minus

BM

47(BC 4)

D2(X2, B2) or D2(, B2)

52(X2) or 52

Branch on Not Equal

BNE

47(BC 7)

D2(X2, B2) or D2(, B2)

52(X2) or 52

Branch on Not High

BNH

47(BC 13)

D2(X2,B2)or 02(,B2)

52(X2) or 52

Branch on Not low

BNl

47(BC 11)

02(X2,B2) or 02(, B2)

52(X2) or 52

BI"clnch on Not Minus

BNM

47(BC 11)

D2(X2,B2)or 02(,B2)

52(X2) or 52

BrClnch on Not Ones

BNO

47(BC 14)

D2(X2, B2) or 02(, B2)

52(X2) or 52

Branch on Not Plus

BNP

47(BC 13)

02(X2, B2) or 02(, B2)

52(X2) or 52

Branch on Not Zeros

BNZ

47(BC 7)

02(X2,B2)or 02(,B2)

52(X2) or 52

Branch if Ones

BO

47(BC 1)

D2(X2, B2) or 02(, B2)

52(X2) or 52

Branch on Overflow

BO

47(BC I)

02(X2, B2) or 02(, B2)

S2(X2) or 52

Branch on Plus

BP

47(BC 2)

02(X2, B2) or 02(, B2)

52(X2) or 52

Branch if Zeros

BZ

47(BC 8)

02(X2, B2) or D2(, B2)

52(X2) or 52

Branch on Zero

BZ

47(BC 8)

D2(X2, B2) or 02(, B2)

52(X2) or 52

Branch Unconditional
Branch Uncondi tiona I

B
BR

47(BC 15)
Q7(BCR IS)

02(X2, B2) or 02(, B2)
R2

52(X2) or 52

Compare
Compore
Compare
Compare
Compare

C
CR
CP
CH
CL

59
19
F9
49
55

RI,D2(X2,B2)or RI,02(,B2)
RI,R2
DI (l 1, Bl), D2(L2, B2)
Rl , D2(X2, B2}or RI, D2(, B2)
R1, D2(X2, B2)or RI, D2(, B2)

RI, 52(X2 or RI ,52

CLC

D5

Dl (L, Bl), D2(B2)

5l(L), S2 or 51 ,52

Algebraic
Algebraic
Dec ima I
Halfword
Logical

Compare Logical
.-----~.----.-.-----.-

122

.

51 (l 1), 52(L2)0 r 51, S2
Rl, S2(X2)or RI ,52
Rl, 52(X2)or Rl ,52

-------------

Type of
Instruction

Instruction

Progrom Interruption
Possible
A S OvP Op Other

Add
Add
Add Decimal
Add Ha Ifword
Add Logical

RX
RR
SS, Dec imo I
RX
RX

Add Logical

RR

Add
Add
Add
Add
Add

Normalized, Extended
Normalized,Long
Norma Iized, Long
Normalized, Short
Normalized, Short

RR,Floating Pt.
RX, Floating Pt.
RR, Floating Pt.
RX,Floating Pt.
RR, Floating Pt.

x E
x x E
x E
x x E
x E

x
x
x
x
x

Add
Add
Add
Add
And

Unnormalized,Long
Unnormalized, Long
UI~normalized, Short
Unnormalized, Short
Logical

RX,Floating Pt.
RR, Floating Pt.
RX,Floating Pt.
RR, Floating Pt.
RX

x x E
x E
x x E
x E
x x

x

x
x
x

And Logical
And Logical
And Logical Immediate

SS
RR
SI

x

x

x

x

Branch and Link
Branch and link

x x F
F
x
o x
x x F
x x

Condition Code Set
01
10

00

II

Overflow
Overflow
Overflow
Overflow
Sum 0

Sum=O
Sum=O
Data Sum=O
Sum"'O
Sum=O@

SumO
Sum >0
Sum>O
Sum >0
Sum'" oCD

Sum='O@

Sum'" 0(8)

Sum=

B,C
B,C
B,C
B,C
B,C

R
R
R
R
R

L
L
L
L
L

M
M
M
M
M

C
C
C
C

R
R
R
R
J

L
L
L
L
K

M
M
M
M

J
J
J

K
K
K

RX
RR

N
N

N
N

N
N

N
N

RX
RR
RX
RR
RX,Ext. Mnemonic

N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N

RX, Ext .Mnemonic

N

N

N

N

Branch on Index High
RS
Branch on Index Low or Equal RS
Branch on Low
RX, Ext.Mnemonic

N
N
N

N
N
N

N
N
N

N
N
N

Branch if Mixed

RX, Ext.Mnemonic

N

N

N

N

Branch on Minus

RX, Ext.Mnemonic

N

N

N

N

Branch on Not Equal

RX, Ext. Mnemonic

N

N

N

N

Branch on Not High

RX, Ext.Mnemonic

N

N

N

N

Branch on Not Low

RX, Ext.Mnemonic

N

N

N

N

Branch on Not Minus

RX, Ext.Mnemonic

N

N

N

N

Branch on Not Ones

RX, Ext.Mnemonic

N

N

N

N

Branch on Not Plus

RX, Ext .Mnemonic

N

N

N

N

Branch on Not Zeros

RX, Ext.Mnemonic

N

N

N

N

Branch if Ones

RX, Ext .Mnemonic

N

N

N

N

Branch on Overflow

RX, Ext .Mnemonic

N

N

N

N

Branch on PI us

RX, Ext .Mnemonic

N

N

N

N

Branch if Zeros

RX, Ext. Mnemonic

N

N

N

N

Branch on Zera

RX, Ext.Mnemonic

N

N

N

N

Branch Unconditional
Branch Unconditional

RX, Ext.Mnemonic
RR, Ext .Mnemonic

N
N

N
N

N
N

N
N

Compare
Compare
Compare
Compare
Compare

RX
RR
S5, Decimal
RX
RX

x x
x x

Z

AA
AA
AA
AA
AA

BB
BB
BB
BB
BB

SS

x

Z

AA

BB

Branch
Branch
Branc:'
Branch
Branch

on
on
on
on
on

Condition
Condition
Count
Count
Equal

Branch on High

Algebraic
Algebraic
Decimal
Halfword
Logical

Compare Logical

x

x x
x

x

x

Z
Z
Data Z
Z

oCD

Sum 0

CD
CD

Appendix D: Machine Instruction Mnemonic Operation Codes

123

Instruction

compare logical
Compare logical
Characters under
M ask

Mnemonic
Operation
Code
ClR
ClM

Machine
Operation
Code

Operand Format
Implicit

Expl icit

15
BD

RI,R2
RI, M3, D2(B2)

RI,M3,52

C ompare logical Immediate

CLI
ClCl
CD
CDR

95
OF
69
29

DI (B1), 12
RI, R2

51,12

Compere lagical long
Compare, long
Compare, long

RI, D2(X2, B2)or RI, D2(, B2)
RI,R2

RI,52(X2)or RI,52

C ompare,5hort
Campare,5hort
C onvert to Binary
C.onvert to Dec imal

CE
CER
CVB
CVD
D
DR
DP
DD
DDR

79
39
4F
4E
5D
ID
FD
6D
2D

RI, D2(X2, B2)or RI, D2(, B2)
RI,R2
RI, D2(X2, B2)or RI, D2(, B2)
RI, D2(X2, B2)or RI, D2(, B2)
RI, D2(X2, B2) or RI, D2(, B2)
RI,R2
DI, (l I, BI), D2(l2, B2)
RI ,D2(X2, B2),or RI, D2(, B2)
RI,R2

RI, 52(X2)or RI, 52

DE
DER
ED
EDMK

7D
3D
DE
DF

RI,D2(X2,B2)or RI,D2(,B2)
RI,R2
DI (l, BI), D2(B2)
DI (l, BI), D2(B2)

RI,52(X2)

or RI,52

51(l),52
51(l),52

or 51,52
or 51,52

X

57

RI, D2(X2, B2) or RI, D2(, B2)

RI, 52(X2)

or RI, 52

Exclusive Or
Exclusive Or
Exclusivp Or Immediate
Execute
H alve, long

XC
XR
XI
EX
HDR

D7
17
97
44
24

DI (l, BI), D2(B2)
RI,R2
DI (BI), 12
RI, D2(X2, B2) or RI, D2(, B2)
RI,R2

51(l),52

or 51,52

51,12
RI,52(X2)

RI,52

Halve,5hort

HER
HDV

34
I
9EOI
9EOOI
43

RI,R2
D1,BI

D ivide
D ivide
D ivide Decimal
D ivide, long

D ivide, long
D ivide, Short
D ivide, 5hort

Ed it
Edit and Mark

xclusive Or

Halt Device

RI, 52(X2)or RI ,52
RI, 52(X2)or RI ,52
RI, 52(X2)
or RI, 52
51(ll),52(l2)or 51,52
RI,52(X2)
or RI ,52

51

D1 (BI)
RI,D2(X2,B2) or RI,D2(,B2)

RI,52(X2)

BF

RI,M3, D2(B2)

RI,M3,52

15K
l

09
58

RI,R2
RI, D2(X2, B2) or RI, D2(, B2)

RI,52(X2)

or RI ,52

lR
lA
lTR
lTDR
lTER

18
41
12
22
32

RI,R2
RI, D2(X2, B2) or RI, D2(, B2)
Rl,R2
RI,R2
RI,R2

RI,52(X2)

or RI ,52

Lood Complement
Load Complement, long
l oad Complement, 5hort

lCR
lCDR
lCER

13
23
33

Rl,R2
RI,R2
Rl,R2

Loed Control
oad Ha Ifword
oad, Long

lCn
lH
lD

B7
48
68

Rl, R3, D2(B2)
R1, D2(X2, B2) or Rl, D2(, B2)
RI, D2(X2, B2) or RI, D2(, B2)

lDR
LM
lNR
LNDR
lNER

28
98
II
21
31

RI,R2
R1, R3, 02(B2)
RI,R2
Rl,R2
Rl,R2

LPR
LPDR
LPER
LPSW

10
20
30
82

Rl,R2
RI,R2
RI ,R2
DI(BI)

lRA
lRDR

BI
25

RI,D2(X2,B2) or RI,D2(,B2)
RI, R2

LRER

35

RI, R2

lE
lER
MC
MVC
MVI

78
38
AF
D2
92

RI, D2(X2, B2) or RI, D2(, B2)
RI,R2
DI(BI),12
DI (l, BI), 02(B2)
DI (BI), 12

Halt I/O

In sert
In sert
nder
In sert
Load
lo ad
lo ad
Lo ad
Lo ad
Load

Character
Characters
Mask
5torage Key

Address
and Test
and Test, long
and Test, Short

oad, Long
oad Multiple
oad Negative
oad Negative, Long
oad Negative, Short
l oad
l oad
Load
l oad

Positive
Positive, Long
Positive, 5hort
PSW

oed Real Address
ood Rounded, Extended
to long
l cad Rounded, Long to
Short
Load, Short
l oad, Short
M onitor Call
M ove Characters
M ove Immediate
----

124

HIO
IC
ICM

Rl, R3, 52
Rl,52(X2)
R I, 52(X2)

or RI, 52

or Rl ,52
or Rl, 52

RI, R3, 52

51
RI,S2(X2) or Rl,S2

RI, S2(X2)

or RI, S2

51,12
SI(l), S2
51,12

or 51,52

I See Note I at end of
this appendix

Type of
Instruction

Instruction

Program Interruptions
Possible
A
P Op Other

Condition Code Set

spv

00

01

10

Z
XX

AA

yy

BB
ZZ

Z

AA

BB

Z

AA

BB

11

Compare Logical
Compare Logical
Characters under
Mask
Compare Logical Immediate

RR
RS

x
x

SI

x

Compare Logical Long

RR

x x

Compare, Long
Compare, Long

RX,Floating Pt.
RR, Floating Pt.

x x
x x

x
x

Z
Z

AA
AA

BB
BB

Compare, Short
Compare, Short
Convert to Binary
Convert to Dec imal
Divide
Divide
Divide Decimal
Divide, Long
Divide, Long

RX, Floating Pt.
RR, Floating Pt.
RX
RX
RX
RR
SS, Decimal
RX,Floating Pt.
RR, Floating Pt.

x x
x
x x
x
x x
x x
x
x x
x
x x E
x E

x
x

x
x
x

F
F
D,Data
B,E
B,E

Z
Z
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

AA
AA
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

BB
BB
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N
N
N

Divide, Short
Divide, Short
Edit
Edit and Mark

RX, Floating Pt.
RR, Floating Pt.
SS, Decimal
SS, Decimal

x x E
x E
x
x
x
x

x
x
x
x

B,E
B, E
Data
Data

N
N
S
S

N
N
T
T

N
N

N
N

J

K

x

x

x

x

Data,F

Exclusive Or

RX

x x

Exclusive Or
Exclusive Or
Exclusive Or Immediate
Execute
Halve, Long

SS
RR
SI
RX
RR, Floating Pt.

x

x

x
x x
x

x

Halve, Short
Halt Device
Halt I/O
Insert Character
Insert Characters under
Mask
Insert Storage Key
Load

RR, Floating Pt.
S
S
RX
RS

x
x

RR
RX

x x
x x

Load
Load
Load
Load
Load

RR
RX
RR
RR, Floating Pt.
RR, Floating Pt.

x
x

Load Complement
Load Complement, Long
Load Complement, Short
Load Control
Load Halfword
Load, Long

RR
RR, Floating Pt.
RR, Floati ng Pt.
RS
RX
RX, Floating.Pt.

x
x
x x
x x
x x

Load, Long
Load Multiple
Load Negative
Load Negative, Long
Load Negative, Short

RR, Floating Pt.
RS
RR
RR, Floating Pt.
RR, Floating Pt.

Load
Load
Load
Load

Positive
Positive, Long
Positive, Short
Ps-N

RR
RR, Floating Pt.
RR, Floating Pt.
SI

x
x
x x

x
x

Load Real Address
Load Rounded, Extended
to Long
Load Rounded, Long to
Short
Load, Short
Load, Short
Monitor Call
Move Characters
Move Immediate

RX
RR, Floating Pt.

x x
x E

x
x

Address
and Test
and Test, Long
and Test, Short

RR,Floating Pt.
RX, Floating Pt.
RR, Floating Pt.
SI
SS
SI

G
x

x

x
A
A
x

x
)J:

A

x
x
F

x

x
x
x

A

x

x
x x

x

x
x

x
x

x
x x
x
x
x
x

E

UU

N
AAL
GG
N
SS

N
N

N
N

N
N

N
N

N
N
J
R
R

N
N
L
L
L

N
N
M
M
M

N
N

P
R
R
N
N
N

L
L
L
N
N
N

M
M
M
N
N
N

0

N
N
N

N
N
J

N
N
L
L
L

N
N

N
N

M
M
M

0

L
L

J
R
R

N
KK
N

A

QQ

QQ

QQ

QQ

A

AAV
N

AAU
N

AAP
N

AAO
N

N

N

N

N

N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N

x
x
x

N

N
CC
CC
N
TT

N
AAM
DD
N

R

x

x
x

J
K
K
J
K
J
(May be set by this instruction)
N
N
N

R

F

U
U

GA

Appendix D: Machine Instruction Mnemonic Operation Codes

125

--

,----

Instruction
1"----------------

Mnemonic Machine
Operation Operation
---Code
.. -.--- f--_~()d~ ___

Operand Format
~-.

Move long
Move Numerics
Move with Offset

MVCL
MVN
MVO

OE
Dl
F1

Rl,R2
D 1(l, B1), D2(B2)
D 1(ll, B1), D2(l2, B2)

Move Zones
Multiply
Multiply
Multiply Decimal
Multiply Extended
Multiply Halfword

MVZ
M
MR
MP
MXR
MH

D3
5C
lC
FC
26
4C

Dl(l,B1),D2(B2)
Rl,D2(X2,B2)or Rl,D2(,B2)
Rl,R2
D 1(ll, B1), D2(l2, B2)
Rl,R2
Rl,D2(X2,B2)or Rl,D2(,B2)

Multiply, long
Multiply, long
Multiply, long to
Extended
Multiply, long to
Extended
Multiply, Short
Multiply, Short
No Operation
No Operation
Or logical
Or logical
Or logical
Or Logical Immediate
Pack

MD
MDR
MXD

6C
2C
67

Rl,D2(X2,B2)0I" Rl,D2(,B2)
Rl,R2
Rl,D2(X2,B2)or Rl,D2(,B2)

MXDR

27

Rl,R2

ME
MER
NOP
NOPR
0
OC
OR
01
PACK

7C
3C
47(BC 0)
07(BC 0)
56
D6
16
96
F2

Implicit

Explicit

51 (l), 52
or SI,S2
5 l(ll), S2(l2) or SI,S2
Sl(l), 52
Rl,S2( X2)

or S 1, S2
or Rl,S2

Sl(Ll), S2(l2) or SI,S2
Rl,S2( X2)

orRl,S2

Rl,S2( X2)

orRl,S2

Rl,S2( X2)

or Rl,S2

R1SS2( X2)

or Rl,S2

S2(X2)

or 52

Rl,S2( X2)
SI (l), 52

or Rl,S2
or 51,52

Rl,D2(X2,B2)or Rl,D2(,B2)
Rl,R2
D2(X2, B2) or D2(, B2)
R2
Rl, D2(X2, B2) or Rl, D2(, B2)
D 1(l, B1), D2(B2)
Rl,R2
Dl(B1),12
D 1(ll, B1), D2(l2, B2)

51,12
S1 (l1), S2(l2) or 51,52

Purge Translation lookaside
Buffer
Read Direct
Reset Reference Bit
Set Clock
Set Clock Comparator
Set CPU Timer

PHB

B20D

-

-

RDD
RRB
SCK
SCKC
SPT

85
B213
B204
B206
B208

Dl (Bl), 12
Dl (Bl)
Dl (Bl)
Dl (Bl)
D 1(B 1)

SI,12
51
SI
51
SI

Set Program Mask
Set Storage Key
Set System Mask
Shift and Round Decimal
Shift left Double Algebraic

SPM
SSK
SSM
SRP
SlDA

04
08
80
FO
8F

Rl
Rl,R2
D 1(B 1)
D 1(ll, B1), D2(B2), 13
Rl, D2(B2)

SI
S 1(Ll), 52,13 or SI,S2,13
Rl,S2

Shift
Shift
Shift
Shift
Shift

SlDL
SlA
Sll
SRDA
SRDl

8D
8B
89
8E
8C

Rl, D2(B2)
Rl, D2(B2)
Rl, D2(B2)
Rl, D2(B2)
Rl, D2(B2)

Rl,S2
Rl,S2
Rl,S2
Rl,S2
Rl,S2

Shift Right Single Algebraic
Shift Right Single logical

SRA
SRl

8A
88

Rl, D2(B2)
Rl, D2(B2)

Rl,S2
Rl,S2

Start I/O
Start I/O Fast Release

510
SIOF

9COO:
9COI

Dl (B 1)
D 1(B 1)

51
51

Store
Store Channel ID
Store Character

ST
STIDC
STC

50
B203
42

Rl,D2(X2,B2)or Rl,D2(,B2)
D 1(B 1)
Rl,D2(X2,B2)or Rl,D2(,B2)

Rl,S2( X2) or Rl,S2
SI
Rl,D2(X2) or Rl,S2

Store
Mask
Store
Store
Store

Characters under

STCM

BE

RI ,M3, D2(B2)

Rl,M3, 52

Clock
Clock Comparator
Control

STCK
STCKC
STCTl

B205
B207
B6

D1(B 1)
Dl(Bl)
Rl,R3,D2(B2)

SI
SI
Rl, R3, 52

Store
Store
Store
Store
Store
Store

CPU ID
CPU Timer
Halfword
long
Multiple
Short

STIDP
STPT
STH
STD
STM
STE

B202
B209
40
60
90
70

Dl (Bl)
Dl (Bl)
RI, D2(X2, B2) or Rl, D2 (, B2)
RI, D2(X2, B2)
RI , R2, D2(B2)
RI,D2(X2,B2)or Rl,D2(,B2)

SI
SI
Rl,S2( X2)
Rl,S2( X2)
Rl, R2, 52
Rl,S2( X2)

Store Then AND System Mask
Store Then OR System Mask
Subtract

STNSM
STOSM
5

AC
AD
5B

D 1(B 1), 12
D 1(B 1),12
RI, D2(X2) or Rl, D2(X2, B2)

51,12
51,12
Rl, S2( X2)

Subtract
Subtract
Subtract
Subtract
Subtract

SR
SP
SH
Sl
SlR

lB
FB
4B
5F
IF

Rl, R2
Dl (ll, B1), D2(l2, B2)
Rl,D2(X2,B2)or Rl,D2(,B2)
RI,D2(X2,B2)or Rl,D2(,B2)
Rl, R2

S 1(Ll), S2(l2)or 51,52
Rl,S2( X2) orRl,S2
Rl,S2( X2) orRl,S2

126

left Double logical
left Single Algebraic
left Single logical
Right Double Algebraic
Right Double logical

Decimal
Ha If word
logical
logical

orRl,S2
or Rl,S2
or Rl,S2

orRl,S2

1See Note 2 at end of
this appendix

Type of
Instruction

Instruction

Program InternJptions
Possible
A 5 Ov P Op Other

Condition Code 5et

00

10

11

Move Long
Move Numerics
Move with Offset

RR
55
55

x x
x
x

x x
x
x

AAA
N
N

AAB
N
N

AAC
N
N

AAD
N
N

Move Zones
Multiply
Multiply
Multiply Decimal
Multiply Extended
Multiply Halfword

55
RX
RR
55, Dec;imal
RR,Floating Pt.
RX

x
x x
x
x x
x E
x x

x
x x
x

Data
B

N
N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N
N

Multiply, Long
Multiply, Long
Multiply, Long!
Extended
Multiply, Long!
Extended
Multiply, Short
Multiply, Short
No Operation
No Operation
Or Logical
Or Logical
Or Logical
Or Logical Immediate
Pack

RX, Floating Pt.
RR, Floating Pt.
RX, Floating Pt.

x x E
x E
x x E

x
x
x x

B
B
B

N
N
N

N
N
N

N
N
N

N
N
N

x E

x

B

N

N

N

N

x x E
x E

x
x

B
B

N
N
N
N
J
J
J
J
N

N
N
N
N
K
K
K
K
N

N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N

N

N

x

A

N

N

N

N

x x
x
x x
x x
x x

A
A
A
A
A

N
AAQ
AAE
N
N

N
AAR
AAF
N
N

N
AAS
N
N

N
AAT
AAG
N
N

x

A
A

RR
N
N
J
J

RR
N
N
L
L

RR
N
N
M
M

RR
N
N
0
0

N
J
N
J
N

N
L
N
L
N

N
M
N
M
N

N
0
N

J
N

L
N

M
N

N

A
A

MM
MM

CC
CC

EE
EE

KK
KK

A

RR, Floating Pt.
RX, Floating Pt.
RR,Flooting Pt.
RX, Ext. Mnemonic
RR, Ext .Mnemonic
RX
55
RR
51
55

x x
x

x

x
x

x
x

Purge Translation Lookaside
Buffer
Read Direct
Reset Reference Bit
Set Clock
Set Clock Comparator
Set CPU Timer

51
5
5
5
S

x x
x x
x x

5et Program Mask
Set Storage Key
Set System Mask
Shift Left Double Algebraic
Sh ift and Round Dec ima I

RR
RR
SI
RS
SS

x x
x
x F
x
D

Sh ift
Shift
Shift
Shift
Shift

5
x

Left Double Logical
RS
RS
Left Single Algebraic
RS
Left Single Logical
Right Double Algebraic RS
Right Double Logical
RS

x x

Data

x
F
x
x

01

N

Shift Right Single Algebraic
Sh ift Right 5 ingle Logical

RS
RS

Start I/O
Start I/O Fast Release

S
S

Store
Store Channel ID
Store Character

RX
S
RX

x x

x

x

x

N
AAH
N

N
CC
N

N
AAI
N

N
KK
N

Store
Mask
Store
Store
Store

Characters under

RS

x

x x

N

N

N

N

Clock
Clock Comparator
Control

S
S
RS

x
x x
x x

x x
x x
x x

AAJ
N
N

AAK
N
N

AAN
N
N

AAG
N
N

Store
Store
Store
Store
Store
Store

CPU ID
CPU Timer
Ha If word
Long
Multiple
Short

S
S
RX
RX,Flooting Pt.
RS
RX, Floating Pt.

x
x
x
x
x
x

x
x
x
x
x
x

A
A

N
N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N
N

A
A

N
N
V

N
N
X

N
N
Y

N
N
0

V
V
V

X
X
X
W,H
W,H

x

x
x
x
x
x
x

Store Then AND System Mask SI
Store Then OR System Mask
SI
RX
Subtract

x
x
x x F

Subtract
Subtract
Subtract
Subtract
Subtract

F
x
D
x x F
x x

Decimal
Ha If word
Logical
Logical

RR
SS, Decimal
RX
RX
RR

x
x

A
A

x
x

x x
x x

x x

Appendix D:

DOlo

Y

y
Y

V,I
V,I

-

0
0
0
W,I
W,I
--.-~-

Machine-Instruction Mnemonic Operation Codes

127

Instruction

128

Mnemonic Machine
Operation Operation
Code
Code

Operand Format
Implicit

Explicit

Subtract Normalized,
Extended
Subtract Normalized, Long
5ubtract Normalized, Long
5ubtract Normalized, Short
5ubtract Nom1alized, 5hort
Subtract Unnormalized, Long

SXR

37

R1,R2

SD
5DR
5E
5ER
5W

6B
2B
7B
3B
6F

Rl,D2(X2,B2)ar Rl,D2(,B2)
Rl,R2
RI,D2(X2,B2)or Rl,D2(,B2)
Rl,R2
RI,02(X2,B2)or Rl,D2(,B2)

5ubtract Unnorma Iized, Long
5ubtract Unnormalized, Short
Subtract Unnormalized, 5hort
Supervisor Call
Test and Set

SWR
5U
SUR
SVC
T5

2F
7F
3F
OA
93

RI,R2
RI,D2(X2,B2)or Rl,02(,B2)
Rl,R2
DI(Bl)

SI

Test Channel
Test I/O
Test Under Mask
Translate
Translate and Test

TCH
TlO
TM
TR
TRT

9F
90
91
DC
DD

DI(Bl)
DI(BI)
D I(B 1), 12
D I(L, BI), D2(B2)
D I (L, B1), D2(B2)

51
SI
51,12
S I(L), 52
51 (L), 52

Unpack
Write Direct
Zero and Add Decimal

UNPK
WRD
ZAP

F3
84
F8

D 1(L1, BI), 02(L2, B2)
DI(BI),12
DI (L I,B I), D2(L2, B2)

SI(L1),52(L2)or 51,S2
51,12
SI(L1), 52(L2)or 51,52

Rl,S2(X2)

or RI,S2

Rl, S2(X2)

or RI, 52

RI, S2(X2)

or RI,52

RI, S2(X2)

or RI,52

I

or 51,52
or 5 1,52

Program Interruptions
Possible

Type of
Instruction

Instruction

A S Ov P Op

Subtract Normalized,
Extended
Subtract Normalized, Long
Subtract Normal ized, Long
Subtract Normalized, Short
Subtract Normalized, Short
Subtract Unnormalized, Long

RR,Floating Pt.

Subtract Unnormalized, Long
Subtract Unnormalized, Short
Subtract Unnormalized, Short
Supervisor Call
Test and Set

RR,Floating Pt.
RX,Floating Pt.
RR, Floating Pt.
RR
SI

Test Channel
Test I/O
Test Under Mask
Translate
Translate and Test

SI
SI
SI
SS
SS

x
x
x

Unpack
Write Direct
Zero and Add Decimal

SS
SI
SS,Decimal

x
x
x

RX,Floating
RR, Floating
RX, Floating
RR, Floating
RX,Floating

Pt.
Pt.
Pt.
Pt.
Pt.

x
x
x
x

Condition Code Set

01

00

Other

10

11

x

E

x

B,C

R

L

M

x
x
x
x
x

E
E

B,C
B,C
B,C
B,C
C

R
R

E
E

x
x
x
x
x

L
L
L
L
L

M
M
M
M
M

Q
Q
Q
Q
Q

x
x
x

E
E
E

x
x
x

C
C
C

R
R

L
L
L
N

M
M
M
N

Q
Q
Q

E

x

R

R
N
SS

x
A
A
x
x
D x

R

R

x
x

A
Data

N

TT

JJ

II

LL
UU
N
PP

CC
VV
N
NN

N
N

N
N
L

J

,-

FF
EE

HH
KK

N

WW
N

00
N
N
M

N
N

0

--

Program Interruptions Possible
Under Ov:

HH

D = Decimal
E = Exponent
F = Fixed Point

II

JJ

KK
LL
MM

Under Other:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
GA
Condition Code Set

H
I

J
K
L
M
N

o
P
Q

R
S
T
U
V

W
X
Y
Z
AA
BB
CC
DD
EE
FF
GG

Privileged Operation
Exponent Underflow
Significance
Decimal Divide
Floating Point Divide
Fixed Point Divide
Execute
Monitoring

NN

00
PP
QQ

RR
SS

TT

No Carry
Carry
Result = 0
Result is Not Equal to Zero
Resul t is Less Than Zero
Result is Greater Than Zero
Not Changed
Overflow
Result Exponent Underflows
Result Exponent Overflows
Result Fraction = 0
Result Field Equals Zero
Result Field is Less Than Zero
Result Field is Greater Than Zero
Difference = 0
Difference is Not Equal to Zero
Difference is Less Than Zero
Difference is Greater Than Zero
First Operand Equals Second Operand
First Operand is Less Than Second Operand
First Operand is Greater Than Second Operand
CSW Stored
Channel and Subchannel not Working
Channel or Subchannel Busy
Channel Operating in Burst Mode
Burst Operation Terminated

Appendix D:

UU
VV
WW
XX

yy

ZZ
AAA
AAB

MC
AAD
AAE
AAF
AAG
AAH
AAI
AAJ

MK
AAL
AAM
AAN
AAO
AAP
AAQ
AAR

MS
AAT
AAU
AAV

Channel Not Operational
Interruption Pending in Channel
Channel Available
Not Operational
Available
I/O Operation Initiated and Channel Proceeding With
its Execution
Nonzero Function Byte Found Before the First Operand
Field is Exhausted
Last Function Byte is Nonzero
All Function Bytes Are Zero
Set According to Bits 34 and 35 of the New PSW Loaded
Set According to Bits 2 and 3 of the Register Specified by Rl
Leftmost Bit of Byte Specified = 0
Leftmost Bit of Byte Specified = 1
Selected Bits Are All Zeros; Mask is All Zeros
Selected Bits Are Mixed (::<:eros and ones)
Selected Bits Are All Ones
Selected bytes are equal, or mask is zero
Selected field of first operand is low
Selected field of first operand is high
First-operand and second-operand counts are equal
First operand count is lower
First operand count is higher
No movement because of destructive overlap
Clock value set
Clock value secure
Clock not operational
Channel ID correctly stored
Channel activi ty prohibited during I D
Clack value is valid
Clock value not necessarily valid
Channel working with another device
Subchannel busy or interruption pending
Clock in error state
Segment- or Page-Table Length Violation
Page-Table Entry Invalid (I-Bit One)
Reference Bit Zero, Change Bit Zero
Reference Bit Zero, Change Bit One
Reference Bit One, Change Bit Zero
Reference Bit One, Change Bit One
Segment Table Entry Invalid (I-Bit One)
Translation Available

Machine-Instruction Mnemonic Operation Codes

129

~---------------.-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------,

RR Format
Operation

Name

Mnemonic

Remarks

Code
---------------4~--------------------------------------+_---------------------~--------------------~

00
01
02
03

Set Program Mask
Branch and Link
Branch on Count
Branch on Condition
Set Storage Key
Insert Storage Key
Supervisor Call

SPM
BALR
BCTR
BCR
SSK
ISK
SVC

OE
OF

Move Long
Compare Logical Long

MVCL
CLCL

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
lA
IB
lC
ID
IE
IF

Load Positive
Load Negative
Load and Test
Load Complement
AND
Compare Logical
OR
Exclusive OR
Load
Compare
Add
Subtract
Multiply
Divide
Add Logical
Subtract Logical

LPR
LNR
L'I'R
LCR
NR
CLR
OR

20

Load Positive (Long)
Load Negative (Long)
Load and Test (Long)
Load Complement (Long)
Halve (Long)
Load Rounded (Extended to Long)
Multiply (Extended)
Multiply (Long to Extended)
Load (Long)
Compare (Long)
Add Normalized (Long)
Subtract Normalized
Multiply (Long)
Divide (Long)
Add Unnormalized (Long)
Subtract Unnormalized (Long)

04

05
06
07

08
09
01'\

DB
OC

21
22
23
24

25
26
27

28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
:30

31
32
33
34

35
36
37
38

130

Load Positive (Short)
Load Negative (Short)
Load and Test (Short)
Load Complement (Short)
Halve (Short)
Load Rounded (Long or Short)
Add Normalized (Extended)
Subtract Normalized (Extended)
Load (Short)

XR

LR
CR

AR
SR
MR
DR
ALE
SLE
I,PDR
LNDR
LTDR
LCDR
HDE
Li<.Lm
~·lXE
~"1XD;(

LDR
CDR
AOR
SOR
MOR
ODR
Afli7R

SWR
LPER
LNER
LTER
LCER
HER
loRER
AXR

SXR
r,j;R

RR Format
Operation

Name

Hnemonic

Remarks

Code
~------------~--------------------------------------------1-----------~--~f-----------------------~

39

3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F

Compare (Short)
Add Normalized (Short)
Subtract Normalized (Short)
Multiply (Short)
Divide (Short)
Add Unnormalized (Short)
Subtract Unnormalized (Short)

CER
i\.ER
SER
DER
AUR
SUR

Store halfword
Load Address
Store Character
Insert Character
Execute
Branch and Link
Branch on Count
Branch on Condition
Load Halfword
Compare Halfword
Add Halfword
Subtract Halfword
Multiply Halfword

STH
LA
STC
IC
EX
BAL
BCT
BC
LH
CH
AH
SH
MH

Convert to Decimal
Convert to Binary

CVD
CVB

Store

ST

AND
Compare Logical
OR
Exclusive OR
Load
Compare
Add
Subtract
Multiply
Divide
Add Logical
Subtract Logical

N

l:vlER

RX Format

40
41
42

43
44
45
46

47
48
49

4A
4B
4C

4E
4F

50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
SA
5B
5C
52
5 ~~
5F

60
61
62
63

Store

CL

o
X
L
C

A
S
M

o
AL
SL
STD

(Long)

64

65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
60
6E
6F

Multiply (Long to Extended)
Load (Long)
Compare (Long)
Add Normalized (Long)
Subtract Normalized (Long)
Multiply (Long)
Divide (Long)
Add Unnormalized (Long)
Subtract Unnormalized (Long)

Appendix 0:

MXD
LD
CD
AD
SO
MD
DO
AW
SW

Machine-Instruction Mnemonic Operation Codes

130.1

RX Format
r-.-

Operation

Name

Mnemonic

Store (Short)

STE

Load (Short)
Compare (Short)
Add Normalized (Short)
Subtract Normalized (Short)
Multiply (Short)
Divide (Short)
Add Unnormalizecl (Short)
Subtract Unnormalized (Short)

LE
CE
AE
SE
ME
DE
1\.U
SU

Remarks

Code
1--

70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
!--

RS,SI, and S Format
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F
AO
Al
A2
A3
A4
AS
A6

130.2

Set System Mask

---

Load PSW
Diagnose
Write Direct
Read Direct
Branch on Index High
Branch on Index Low or Equal
Shift Right Single Logical
Shift Left Single Logical
Shift Right Single
Shift Left Sinqle
Shift Right Double Logical
Shift Left Double Logical
Shift Right Double
Shift Left Double

SSM
LPSW
WRD
RDD
BXH
BXLF
SRL
SLL
SRi'.
SLA
SRDL
SLDL
SRDA
SLD1\.

Store Multiple
Test under Mask
Move (Immediate)
Test and Set
AND (Immediate)
Compare Loqical (Immedi a t(~)
OR (Immediate)
Exclusive OR (Immediate)
Load Multiple

S'I'M
TM
MVI
TS
NI
CLI

Start I/O, Start I/O Fast Release
Test I/O
Halt I/O, Halt Device
Test Channel

SIO,SIOF
TIO
HIO,HDV
TCH

01

XI
LM

See i'Jote 2
See Note 1

RS,SI, and S Format
Operation
Code

Name

Mnemonic

Remarks

A7
A8
A9
AA

AB
AC
AD
AE
AF

BO
Bl
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF

Store Then AND System Mask
Store Then OR System Mask

STNSM
STOSM

Monitor Call

MC

Load Real Address
LRA
(First byte of two-byte operation codes)

Store Control
Load Control

STCTL
LCTL

Compare Logical Characters under Mask
Store Characters under Mask
Insert Characters under Mask

CLM
STCM
ICM

Move Numerics
Move (Characters)
Move Zones
AND (Characters)
Compare Logical (Characters)
OR (Characters)
Exclusive OR (Characters)

MVN
MVC
MVZ
NC
CLC
OC
XC

Translate

TR

•

SS Format
CO
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
DO
Dl
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC

Appendix D: Machine-Instruction Mnemonic Operation Codes

130.3

•

SS Format'
Operation

Name

Hnemonic

Translate and Test
Edit
Edit and Mark

TRT
ED
EDMK

Shift and Round Decimal
Move with Offset
Pack
Unpack

SRP
MVO
PACK
UNPK

Zero and Add Decimal
Compare Decimal
Add Decimal
Subtract Decimal
Multiply Decimal
Divide Decimal

ZAP
CP
AP
SP
MP
DP

Remarks

Code
DD
DE
DF
EO
El
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
W8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
FO
FI

F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Fa
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF

NOTES
1. Under the System/370 architecture, the machine operations for Halt Device and Halt
I/O are as follows:

~OOI

1110

XXXX

XXXoJ

Halt I/O

HIO

[001

1110

XXXX

XXXII

Halt Device

HDV

(X denotes an iqnored bit position)

130.4

2. Under the Systemv370 architecture, the machine operations for Start I/O and Start
I/O Fast Release are as follows:
1001 1100

xxx x

XXXO Start 1/0

SIO

1001 1100 XXXX XXX1 Start I/O Fast Release

SlOP

(X denotes an ignored bit position)

Operation
Code
B202
B203
B204
B205
B206
B207
8208
8209
820D
B213

Mnemonj.c

Name
Store CPU 1D
Store Channel ID
Set Clock
Store Clock
Set Clock Comparator
Store Clock Comparator
Set CPU Timer
Store CPU Timer
Purge Translation
Lookaside Buffer
Reset Reference Bit

STIDP
ST1DC
SCK
STCK
SCKC
STCKC
SPT

STPT
PTLB
RRB

Appendix D: Machine-Instruction Mnemonic Operation Codes

130.5

APPENDIX E: ASSEMBLER INSTRUCTIONS

r---------T--------------------------------T--------------------------------------------,
Name Entry
I
Operand Entry
I

I Operation I

~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------~

I ACTR
IMust not be present
IAn arithmetic SETA expression
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------~
I AGO
IA sequence symbol or not presentlA sequence symbol
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------~
IAIF
IA sequence symbol or not presentlA logical expression enclosed in parenthe-I
I
I
Ises, immediately followed by a sequence I
I
I
I symbol
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------~
I ANOP
I A sequence symbol
IWill be taken as a remark
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------~
ICCW
IAny symbol or not present
IFour operands, separated by commas
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------~

ICNOP
I

IA sequence symbol or not presentlTwo absolute
I comma

expressions,

separated

I

by

al
I

~---------+--------------------------------+---------------------------------------------~

ICOM
IA sequence symbol or not presentlWill be taken as a remark
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------4
I COpy
I Must not be present
I A symbol
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------~
ICSECT
IAny symbol or not present
IWill be taken as a remark
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------~
I CXD *
I Any symbol or not present
I Will be taken as a remark
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------~
IDC
IAny symbol or not present
lOne or more operands, separated by commas
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------~
I DROP
IA sequence symbol or not presentlOne to sixteen absolute expressions, sepa-I
I
I
I rated by commas
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------~
IDS
IAny symbol or not present
lOne or more operands, separated by commas
I
~-.--------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------~
I DSECT
I A variable symbol or an
IWill be taken as a remark
I
I
I ordinary symbol
I
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------4
I DXD *
I A symbol
lOne or more operands, separated by commas
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------~
I EJECT
IA sequence symbol or not presentlWill be taken as a remark
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------~
'I END
I A sequence symbol
I A relocatable expression
I
I
lor not present
lor not present
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------~-----------i
I ENTRY
IA sequence symbol or not present lOne or more relocatable symbols, separated I
I
I
I by commas
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------4
IEQU
I A variable symbol or an
IAn absolute or relocatable expression
I
I
I ordinary symbol
I
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------i
I EXTRN
IA sequence symbol or not present lOne or more relocatable symbols, separated I
I
I
Iby commas
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------~
IGBLA
IMust not be present
lOne or more variable symbols that are to bel
I
I
lused as SET symbols, separated by commas 2
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------~
IGBLB
IMust not be present
lOne or more variable symbols that are to bel
I
I
lused as SET symbols, separated by commas 2
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------~
IGBLC
IMust not be present
lOne or more variable symbols that are to bel
I
I
lused as SET symbols, separated by commas 2
I
~---------+--------------------------------+--------------------------------------------4
lICTL
lMust not be present
lOne to three decimal values, separated byl
I
1
I commas
I
~---------~--------------------------------~--------------------------------------------i
1* Assembler F only
I

IL ___________________________________________________________________ ..JI

Appendix E:

Assembler Instructions

131

r-------r----------------------Operation
I

I

,L _______
Entry
IL _______________________
Name Entry
I

I

: LCLB

: Must not be present

I

I

r

I

r:

T

-----------------------------,

I

I

I

_____________________________
Operand Entry
JI

~

I

I

•

'- !.S~~ ____ L ~~s~ _ O! _b~ _p_r~s_e~~ _________ 1 _ rr:w:, _d:~l:.m~~ ~~l~=s-, _ ~ep~r~~e.? _ ~y_ ~ .?~~~ -{
: LeLA
: Must not be present
lOne or more variable symbols that are to ,
"
I
be used as SET symbols, separated by
I
L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ L _ _ _ _ _ _ _______ .__________ .1 _ ~0.!!ll!!a_s ~ _______________________ .J
'

One or more variable symbols that are to :
be used as SET symbols, separated by
commas 2
,

--------------------------------------------------------------,
: LCLC
: Must not be present.
: One or more variable symbols separated
,

I

L _______ ,_ ._____________ .__________ .L _by_ ~o~a_s ~ _____________________ -'

L
_______ L
_______________________
, LTORG
'Any
symbol or not present

, MACRO 1

'.Must not be present

J'
' _________
Will be taken ___________________
as a remark

~

'

~

Will be taken as a remark

I

~-------~-----------------------~---------~-------------------~

, MEND1

I

:________
MEXIT1
I
I MNOTE 1

A sequence symbol or not present' Will be taken as a remark
,
--------------------------------T-----------------------------1
A sequence symbol or not present, Will be taken as a remark
L
_____________________________________________________ _ I
I

. '
,
A sequence symbol, a var1able
A severity code, followed by a comma,
I
symbol or not present
, followed by any combination of characters,
,________ L _____________ ... _________ ..! _ «:.n~!.o~!:~.!-~ ~~o~~r_oEI:.e~ ____________ ~

I

I,

OPSYN*

II
I

An or d'1nary symb 0 1

I

'
· · ·
· co d e, an
I
Ah
mac 1ne 1nstruct10n
mnemon1C

:
I

I

extended mnemonic code, or an operation ,
code defined by a previous OPSYN instruc-,
tion
I

r-----------------------,-----------------------------~

A machine or extended mnemonic
operation code

I
I

,

,Blank
I

I
,

I

I

r-------r-----------------------,-----------------------------.
ORG
, A sequence symbol or not present
A relocatable expression or not present

I

r-------r-----------------------,-----------------------------.
I PRINT
A sequence symbol or not present lone to three operands
I

i

I

PUNCH - - -'-A- ;eq~e~~e- ~ymb~l-~; ;;t- pr~;;nt , - On~ - t-o-e-ighty - c-h~;a~te~; ~~;l~;ed - i~-

L _______ IL

I

I

REPRO

I

I

SETA

I

_______________________ 1I

A sequence symbol or not present

L _______ L _______________________

A SETA symbol

I

_____________________________
J
apostrophes
Will be taken as a remark

~---------------------

I

- - -:

________ JI

An arithmetic expression

I

~-------r-----------------------~-----------------------------~

I

SETB

A SETB symbol

f

I ,

I
I

A 0 or a 1, or logical expression
enclosed in parentheses

I
I

r-------r-----------------------~-----------------------------~

I

SETC

A SETC symbol

I

I

I
I

,

I

A type attribute, a character expression,
a substring notation, or a concatenation
of character expressions and substring
notations

I

I

I

~-------~-----------------------+-----------------------------~

I

SPACE

I

I

A, sequence symbol or not present,

I

I

A decimal self-defining term or not
present

I
I

~-------r-----------------------~-----------------------------~

I

START

I

Any symbol or not present

I

A self-defining term or not present

r -' - - - - - -,- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - T - - - - - - - - - - - - - -' - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,

I

I TITLE3
I A special symbol (0 to 4 charlOne to 100 characters, enclosed in
I
I
I acters), a sequence symbol, a
apostrophes
I
I
I
variable symbol, or not
I
I
I
present
I
I
r-------r-----------------------,-----------------------------~
I USING
I A sequence symbol or not present I An absolute or relocatable expression
I

i
IL

I
I
followed by 1 to 16 absolute expres_______ LI _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ I _sions,
_ _ _ _ _separated
_ _ _ _ _ _ _by
_ _commas
______________
~

I

I

I

'

~

I

: WXTRN
: A sequence symbol or not present lOne or more relocatable symbols, sepa: :
: rated by commas

I

:
:

~---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------~

1

May only be used as part of a macro-definition.

2SET symbols may be defined as subscripted SET symbols.
3See Section 5 for the description of the name entry.

*Assembler

F only.

I
LI _____________________________________________________________ J

132

I

:

~SSEMBLER

STATEMENTS

r---------------------------T-----------"------------------T-----------------------------,
I

INSTRUCTION

I

I

!\.lAM.F: EHTRY

I

OPERAND ENTRY

.---------------------------+-----~-----------------------+-----------------------------~

IModel Statements 3
I
I
I
I
I

..

IAn ordinary symbol, variable
I symbol, sequence variable
I symbol, a cOnlnination of
Ivariable symbols and other
Icharacters that is equivalent
Ito a symbol, or not present

I
I

IAny combination of charlaeters (includinq variable
I symbols)
I

I

I
I
I

I

I

.---------------------------+-----------------------------+-----------------------------~

IPrototype Statement 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

IA symbolic parameter or
Inot present
I
I
I
I
I
I

IZero or more operands that
I
lare symbolic parameters, sep-I
larated by commas, followed byl
Izero
or
more
operands I
I (separated by commas) of thel
Iform
symbolic
parameter, I
lequal sign, optional standardl
Ivalue
I

.---------------------------+-----------------------------+-----------------------------~

I Macro-Instruction
IStatement 1

I

I
I
I

IAn ordinary symbol, a
IZero or more positional
Ivariable symbol, a sequence
loperands separated by commas,
I symbol, a combination of
Ifollowed by zero o~ more
Ivariable symbols and other
Ikeyword operands (separated
Icharacters that is equivalent I by commas) of the form
Ito a symbol,2 or not present I keyword, equal sign, value 2

I
I
I
I
I
I

.---------------------------+-----------------------------+------------------------------~

IAssembler Language
IStatement 3 ..
I
I
I
I
lI ___________________________

IAn ordinary symbol, a varIAny combination of characters I
liable symbol, a sequence
I (including variable symbols) I
I
I
I symbol, a combination
lof variable symbols and
I
I
lother characters that is
I
I
lequivalent to a symbol,
I
I
lor
not present
J _____________________________ JI
_____________________________

~

~

May only be used as part of a macro definition.
Variable symbols appearing in a macro instruction are replaced by their values
before the macro instruction is processed.
3 Variable
symbols may be used to generate assembler language mnemonic operation
codes as listed in Section 5, except ACTR, COPY, END, ICTL, CSECT, DSECT,
ISEQ,
PRINT, REPRO,
and START.
Variable symbols may not be used in the name and
operand entries of the following instructions: COPY,
END,
ICTL,
and ISEQ.
Variable symbols may not be used in the name entry of the AcrR instruction .
.. No substitution for variables in the line following a REPRO statement is
performed.
5 When the name field of a macro instruction contains a sequence symbol,
the sequence symbol is not passed as a name field parameter.
It only

1

~

______ ~::_~::~~~~_~:_~_~~::~~::_~::~~~_:::~~:_:~~_~~~~~:~~~~~_~::~~b!!_~ ________________ J

Appendix E:

Assembler Instructions

133

APPENDIX F: SUMMARY OF CONSTANTS

r------T---------T--------T--------T--------------T---------T---------T--------T---------,
I
I
1
I
1
1 NUMBER 1
1
1
1

1
1
1

1

1

1 LENGTH 1
1
1 SPECIFIED
I RANGE 1
BY

I IMPLIED 1
1 MODII LENGTH 1 ALIGN- I FIER

I TYPE 1 (BYTES) 1

MENT

1 OF CON- I
r
1 STANTS 1 RANGE
1 RANGE
1 PER
1 FOR EX- 1 FOR

I OPERAND I PONENTS r SCALE

1 TRUN- 1
1 CATION/ I
I PADDING I
1 SIDE
r

~------+---------+--------+--------+--------------+---------+---------+--------+---------~

I C
,

I as
I needed

1 byte
I

1.1 to I characters
1 256 (1) I

lone
1
I
" "

1 right

,
I

~------+---------+--------+--------+--------------+---------+---------+--------+---------i

I X

,as
I byte
1.1 to I hexadecimal l o n e ,
I
I left
I
,
I needed I
I 256 (1) I digits
I
I
I
I
I
~------+---------+--------+--------+--------------+---------+---------+--------+---------i
"B
'as
, b y t e , .1 to I binary
lone,
,
I left
,
,
'needed I
,256
I digits
,
,
,
,
,
~------+---------+--------+--------+--------------+---------+---------+--------+---------i

IF' 4

,

1

I word

1

,.1 to
1 8

I decimal

I digits

'multi1 pIe

I -85 to
, +75

I -187 tol left
1 +346
1

(4)

I

,

~------+---------+--------+--------+--------------+---------+---------+--------+---------i

,H
I

,2

1 half

I

I word

,.1 to
,8

1 decimal
I digits

1 multiI pIe

,-85 to
I +75

1 -187
,+346

1 left (4) 1
I

I

~------+---------+--------+--------+--------------+---------+---------+--------+---------i

1E
I

1

I 4

1

1.1 to
I 8

I decimal
I digits

1 pIe

I -85 to
I +75

I

I

,

,

,

I word

I 8

1 digits

, pIe

I +15

I 0-14,

,

I word

I multi-

,0-14

Irig~t

(4)1

.------+---------+--------+--------+--------------+---------+---------+--------+---------i
I D
I 8
1 double 1 .1 to I decimal
'multi- r -85 to r
I right (4)1
~------+---------+--------+--------+--------------+---------t---------7--------t---------~

(3)116

'double 1. 1 to
I word
1 16

I decimal
, digits

I -85 to

10-28
Iright (4)1
I
I
I
~------4_--------+_-------+------- ... -----------.-... --------... ----------f------..... -t--------'1
I P
I as
I byte
1·1 to I decimal
I multi- ,
I
I left
,
I
'needed I
, 16
I digits
I pIe,
I
,
I
'L
,

1

I multi-

I pIe

I +75

~------+---------+--------+--------+--------------+---------+---------+--------+---------i
Z
'as
I byte
1.1 to I decimal
'multi- I
I
,left,
1
1 needed ,
, 16
, digits
I pIe
I
,
I
I

I

.------+---------+--------+--------+--------------+---------+---------+--------+---------i
1A
,4
1 word
1'.1 to 'any
I multi- ,
1
I left
I

I
1
, 4 (2) I expressio~
1 pIe
1
1
1
,
~------+---------+--------+--------+--------------+-----~---+---------+--------+---------i
I Q(3) 14
1 word
,1-4
I ~yrnbol narn- ,mult1- I
I
I left
I
I
I
I
,
I 1ng a DXD
I pIe
1
I
I
I

,

•______ +---------+--------+--------+-Q.-P~~~l-----+---------+---------+--------+---------i
I 4
I word
I 3 or
1 relocatable 1 multi- ,
1
I left
,

I V
,

I

,

,

I
I
,
1
I
1

,
I
I
1
1
I

I word,
I
I
I
,
I
,
,
1
I
I

4

1 symb()l

I pIe,

I

,

,

1
I

I
I

I
,

I
I

I
1
I

1
I
I

I
I
,

I
,
I

.------+---------+--------+--------+--------------+---------+---------+--------+---------i
1S
I 2
,half
I 2 only lone absolute 1 multi- 1
,
1
,
1
1
1
I

or relocatab-, pIe
Ie expression,
or two absol-I
ute express- I
, ions:
,
1 exp (exp)
,

,

,

,

,

~------+---------+--------+--------+--------------+---------+---------+--------+---------i
,y
,2
,half
1. 1 to I any
I multi- I
I
1 left
,

1

,
1 word
1 2 (2) 1 expression
1 pIe,
1
1
,
.------~---------~--------~--------~--------------~---------~---------~--------L---------i
1 (1) In a DS assembler instruction C and X type constants may have length specification 1
I
to 65535.
1
I (2) Bit length specification permitted with absolute expressions only. Relocatable A- ,
1
type constants, 3 or 4 bytes only~ relocatable y-type constants, 2 bytes only.
I
I (3) Assembler F only.
I
I (4) Errurs will be flagged if significant bits are truncated or if the value specified I
L___ :~~~~_~:.~~~:.~~~d_~~_t~=_~m~~~e..?_:.e~~~_~~_t..?~_~~~t~~t_= ____________________ J

Appendix F:

Summary of constants

135

MACRO LANGUAGE SUMMARY

APPENDIX G:

The four charts in this appendix summarize the macro language described in Part II of
this publication.
Chart 1 indicates which macro language elements may be used in the name and operand
entries of each statement.
Chart 2 is a summary of the expressions that may be used in macro-instruction
statements.
Chart 3 is a summary of the attributes that may be used in each expression.
Chart 4 is a summary of the variable symbols that may be used in each expression.

Variabl. Symbol.
~--------------r----------------------------------------~
Global SET Symbols
local SET Symbols
System Variable Symbols

Attributes

~----r-----.-----r-----_r---r------.----_r------,,-----.------~------r---~·-,------,---~----.----~

Statement

Symbolic
Parameter

SETA

SETC

SETB

SETA

SETB

SETe

r-------~------~----~------~------r_---_r-------

MACRO

t-------+------t------f-----+------- - - - - - .-.Pratotype
Statement

-.-~---

&SYSNDX

&SYSEeT

&SYSLIST

Type

------ - ---+-----1-----

length

Scaling

Integer

_.

,.-....- - - -.------t-----t----.- -----~.-.-

Name
Operand

-

t-------+-----t-----f'-----,-r---- ..- + - - - -f -----+-- - . - - - l - - , - - f - - - t - - - . - . - + - - - - t - - --.. ~--~.GBlA

Operand
--.----

GBtB

.--.-

-.-.-

GBle

Operand

lClA

-'--f-----

._.

Operand

---

- -.

t··

Operand
Name
Operation
Operand

Name
Operation
Operand

Nome
Operation
Operand

Name
Operation
Operand

Nome
Operation
Operand

Nome
Operation
Operand

t------+------t-----+---_I_-'---~-'--_+-'-----

SETA
Operan;

Name
Operand

Operand 3

Operand 9

Operan~

Operanct6

Nome
Operand

Ope",nd

Operand 7

OperandS

SETe

--

Nome
Operation
Operand

Name
Operation
Operand

Operand9

Operand

c----

-.-+-----+---

Operand 3

Operan~

6
Operand

Operand4 Operand6

Operand 4

Name
Operand

Operand

Operand

Operand

~----

Operand 6

Operand 6

Nome
Operand

Name
Operand

Operand 7

OperandS

Operon;

Operand 6

Operand 6

Operand

Operand 6

Operand

r------~-----t__----~------t-----

Operand 6

Operand

Operand

Operand

Operand

OperandS OperandS
--- - _. - - -' ..

--

----+------+

Operand 6

Operand 4

Operand 4 Operand 6

--c··-- .--- ---...----+----_+------

Operand

-

---,--+-.--4~-.---f---.--

t-----t----+---+----+----t-----r------t----r---Operand 6

Nam.

Nome
Nome
Operation Operation
Operand Operand

Name
Operand

t------r------t-----~------+_

- . .-

OperandS

_.

-.--.-

OperandS

Operand

-

OperandS

OperandS

..

OperandS

-' .._. --... - - - - - f - - . - - .. - - - - . - .

OperandS

OperandS

~-------

OperandS

-,

t-----+_------lr-----_+------+_----_1r-----t----+------i~

Operanct2

Operand 3

Operand

Operand 2

Operand 3

Operand

Operanct2

--.. -.--- f-'--'-- 1-.-----:- -----.-Opertond

Operon;

t - - - - + _ - - - - - l r - - - _ + - - - - t - - - - - - l t - - - - - - t - - - - + . - - - - ------

--.

-- .....

Operand

f-----I-.----- - - - --

Operand

-.-

--

----

Operand
Operand
roo -.~

-.

Name

...

~.-

-Name

MEXIT

t-----+_----lr---_+-----t-----it----t--.,----- -----Operand

Operand

Operand

Operand

Operand

Operand

Operand

MEND

-----t------+-----~---~-.----

Operand

Operand

Name
Operand

Name
Operand

Name
Operand

Name
Operand

Nome
Operand

- . .-

-----+-----+-------

Name
Operand

Name
Operand

Name
Operand

Name
Operand

Name
Operand

Name
Operand

t-----+_--_1~---_+----+_--_1~----_I_----+_----

Assembler
language
Statement
t-------~

____

Name
Operation
Operand
____

~~

~

Name
Operation
Operand
______

Name
Operation
Operand
__

~_'_

Nome
Operation
Operand
____

~~

Name
Operation
Operand
__

_L~

f-.-....-.--

-f-- .--

r-'- . - -.-

Name

-.

-.~.-

Name

Name
Operand

t------+_--_1~---_+----+_---_1~---_I_------+_----~~------+_--_+-----r______-

Name
Operand

-----_r-----I------4~---.

Name

Operand

- - - - - t - - - - f - - - - +------+-.-. -- --

Outer
Mocra

1.
2.
3.
04.
S.
6.
7.
S.
9.

Name
Operand
f-·

.-

Operand

ANOP

Inner
Mocra

---

Name
Operand

AGO

MNOTE

....-

.- - - - - -----,+-----_.. _.-1---_.-

lelC

ACTR

....
.

---+------1-------- - - - - - f - - - - - - - ----r-------f----.- .--. -. ....-

lClB

AIF

-

--

-.---

t-----+-----t-----+------_I_----~--_+----+_----~---_1~--+_------r__---

SETB

...

Operand

r-----~----~--~---~-

Model
Statement

_. --,..__

_.

~-----

Operand

r-----~---t__--~---~---t__--_r---+----t------

Sequence
Symbol

Number

Count

Name
Operand

Name
Operand

..

~_'__~L__.

___

~

______

•..

~.-

.-

..

-

... - . -

--Name

Name
Operand

---- f---r--'--

Nome
Operotion
Operand

-

~._._~

-

_ _ _ _ _L ___

Nome

.-

Variable symbols in macro-instructions are replaced by their valves before processing.
Only if value i••elf-defining term.
Converted to arithmetic +1 or -!{).
Only in character relations.
Only in arithmetic relations.
Only in arithmetic or character relation ••
Converted to unsigned number.
Converted to character 1 or O.
Only if one to eight decimal digih.

Chart 1.

Macro Language Elements

Appendix G:

Macro Language Summary

137

Chart 2.

Conditional Assembly Expressions

r-------------T-------------------------T---------------------------T-------------------,
I Expression I Arithmetic Expressions I Character Expressions
I Logical Expressions I
.-------------+-------------------------+---------------------------t-------------------i
May
1. Self-defining terms
1. Any combination of
11. SETB symbols
contain

2. Length, scaling,
integer, count, and
number attributes
3. SETA and SETB symbols
4. SETC symbols whose
value is 1-8 decimal
digits
5. Symbolic parameters
if the corresponding
operand is a selfdefining term
6. &SYSLIST(n) if the
corresponding operand
is a self-defining
term
7. &SYSLIST(n,m) if the
corresponding operand
is a self-defining
term
8. &SYSNDX

~

characters enclosed
12.
in apostrophes
I
2. Any variable symbol
13.
enclosed in apostrophes I

I

Arithmetic relations!.
Character relations 2

3. A concatenation of
I
variable symbols and
I
other characters
I
enclosed in apostrophes
4. A request for a type
attribute

•.-.------------t------------------------- +------ --------------------t -------------------i

I Operators
I are ; .

I +,-,*, and /
I pa rentheses penni tted

I concatenation, with alAND, OR, and NOT
I period (.)
I parentheses per-

I
I

I

I

I

I mi t ted

1

I of values

I

I

11 (true)

I

I used in

1 2. Arithmetic relations
I 3. Subscripted St~T
I
symbols
I 4. &SYSLIST
I 5. Substring notation
I 6. sublist notation

I 2. Character relations 2

12. AIF operands

1

.-------------t-------------------------+---------------------------t-------------------i
I Range
I -2
to +2 -1
I 0 through 255 characters 10 (false) or
I
31

31

.-------------+-------------------------+---------------------------t-------------------i
I May be
I 1. SETA operands
I 1. SETC operands
11. SETB operands
I
3

I
I
I
I
I

I
1
I
I
I

I
I
I
I
I

I
I
I
1
I

.-------------~-------------------------~---------------------------~-------------------~

I

An arithmetic relation consists of two arithmetic exptessions related by thel
operators GT, LT, EQ, NE, GE, or LE.
1
I 2 A character relation consists of two character expressions related by the operator I
I
GT, LT, EQ, NE, GE, or LE. The type attribute notation and the substring notation I
may also be used in charact.er relations.
The maximum size of the character I
I
I
expressions that can be compared is 255 characters.
If the two character I
I
expressions are of unequal size, then the smaller one will always compare less thanl
I
the larger.
I
IL_____________________________________________________
3
Maximum of eight characters will be assigned.
------------------------- _________ JI
1

I

138

Chart 3.

Attributes

*
r-----------T----------T----------------------T-----------------------T-----------------,
I Attribute I Notation IMay be used with:
IMay be used only if
IMay be used in
I

' I
'type attribute i s : ,
I
I
~-----------+----------+----------------------+-----------------------+-----------------~
I Type
,T'
ISymbols outside
I (May always be used)
11. SETC operand I
I
I
,macro definitions;
,
I
fields
I
I
I
I symbolic parameters,
,
12. Character
I
I
,
I &SYSLIST'( n), and
I
I
relations
I
I &SYSLIST (n, m) inside I
I
,
I
,
I
I
I macro ·definitions
I
I
I
~-----------+----------+----------------------+-----------------------+-----------------~
I Length
I
L'
I Symbols outside
I Any letter except
I Arithmetic
I
,
I
lmacro definitions;
IM,N,O,T, and U
I expressions
I
,
I
I symbolic parameters,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I &SYSLIST(n), and
I
I
I
I
I &SYSLIST(n, m) inside I
I
I
I macro definitions
I
,
I
.-----------+----------+----------------------+-----------------------+-----------------~
I Scaling
I
S'
ISymbols outside
I H,F,G,D,E,L,K,P,
I Arithmetic
I
,
,
lmacro definitions;
, and Z
,expressions
I
t
I
I symbolic parameters,
,
I
I
I
I
I
,
,
I &SYSLIST(n), and
,
,
I &SYSLIST(n,m) inside ,
,
I
,
,
I macrodefini tions
,
,
I
.-----------+----------+----------------------+-----------------------+-----------------~
,Integer
I
I'
ISymbols outside
I H,F,G,D,E,L,K,P,
I Arithmetic
I
,
I
I macro· -definitions;
I and Z
I expressions
I
,
I
,symbolic parameters,
,
,
I
,
I
,'SYSLIST(n), and
,
I
I
I
I
, &SYSLIST (n, m) inside I
I
I
,
,
'macro ·definitions
I
I
I
.-----------+----------+-------~--------------+-----------------------+-----------------~
I Count
I
K'
ISymbolic parameters
IAny letter
I Arithmetic
I
I
I expressions
I
,
I
I corresponding to
I
I
I
,
,
I macro instruction
,
,
,operands, &SYSLIST
I
I
I
,
,
I(n), and &SYSLIST(n,m)I
I
I
I
I
I inside macro
I
I
I
I
I
I definitions
I
I
I
.-----------+----------+----------------------+-----------------------+-----------------~
I Number
I
N'
ISymbolic parameters,
IAny letter
,Arithmetic
I
I
,
I'SYSLIST, a n d ,
I expressions
I
,
,
,&SYSLIST(n) inside
,
I
I
def ini tions
, _________________ JI
,L ___________ L, __________ L'IDilcro
______________________
L, _______________________ L

• NOTE: There are definite restrictions in the use of these attributes.
Section 9.

Appendix G:

Refer to text,

Macro Language Summary

139

Chart 4.

Variable Symbols

r--------------T-------------T-----------------T--------------T-------------------------,
IVar.iable
IDefined by:
I Initialized,
IValue changed
be used in:
I
I symbol

I

I~.ay

lor set to:

I by:

I

I

.--------------+-------------+-----------------+--------------+-------------------------~

I Symbolic 1
I parameter
I
I

I Prototype
I statement
I
I

I Corresponding
I 1l34
SAMP1l35
SAMPL 136
SAMP1l37
SAMP1l38
SAMP1l39
SAMP1l40
SAMP1l41
SAMP1l42
SAHP1l43
SAMP1l44
SAMP1l45
SAMPLl46
SAMP1l47
SAMPLl4S
SAMP1l49
SAMP1l50
SAMP1l51
SAMPl152
SAMP1l53
SAMP1l54
SAMPLl55
SAMP1l56
SAMP1l57
SAMPLl58
SAMPLl59
SAMP1l60
SAMPLl61
SAMPl162
SAMP1l63
SAMP1l64
SAHP1l65
SAMP1l66
SAHPLl67
SAMP1l68
SAMPl169
SAMP1l70
SAHPLl71
SAMP1l72
SAMPll73
SAHPLl74
SAMPLl75
SAMPl176
SAMPll17
SAMPl178
SAMP1l79
SAMPL1S0
SAHP1l81
SAMPLl82
SAMP1l83
SAMPLl84
SAMPl185
SAMPLl86
SAMPlUn
SAMP1l88
SAMPLlS9

Appendix H:

Sample Program

143

APPENDIX I:

ASSEMBLER LANGUAGES--FEATURES COMPARISON CHART

Features not shown below are common to all assemblers. In the chart:
Dash
Not a II owed.
= As defined in Operating System/360 Assembler Language Manual.
X

Feature

Basic
Progromming
Support/36O:
Basic
Assembler

7090/7094
Support
Package
Assembler

BPS 8K Tape,
BOS 8K Disk
Assemblers

DOS/TOS
Assembler

05/360
Assembler

No. of Continuation Cards/Statement
(exclusive of macro-instructions)

0

0

1

1

2

Input Character Code

EBCDIC

BCD & EBCDIC

EBCDIC

EBCDIC

EBCDIC

Maximum Characters per symbol

6

6

8

8

8

Character self-defining terms

1 Char. only

X

X

X

X

Binary self-defining terms

----

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Extended mnemonics

-

X

X

X

X

Maximum Location Counter value

2 16 _1

224_1

224_1

224_1

224_1

Multiple Control Sections per assembly

-

--

X

X

X

ELEMENTS:

Length attribute reference
Literals

-

EXPRESSIONS:
Operators

+ -*

+ -*/

+ -*/

+ -*/

+ -*/

Number of terms

3

16

3

16

16

Levels of parentheses

---

---

1

5

5

X

X

X

----

---

---

X

X

X2

X

- -

Except
Address
Consts.

X

X

--- -

----

--

X2

X

X

X

X

X

X

X
X

X

Complex relocatability
ASSEMBLER INSTRUCTIONS:
DC and OS
Expressions allowed as modifiers
Multiple operands
Multiple constants in an operand

Bit length specifications
Scale modifier
Exponent Modifier
DC types

Except
B, P, Z
V, Y, S, L

Except
B, V, L

Except L

X2

DC dupl ication factor

Except A

X

Except S

X

1Assembler F only
2DOS 14K D Assembler only

Appendix I:

Assembler Languages--Features Comparison Chart

145

-Feature

-DC duplication factor of zero

Basic
Programming
Support/360:
Basic
Assembler

7CfJO/7CfJ4
Support
Package
Assembler

- -

--

Except
H, E, D

X

f---

DS types
f---

DS length modi fer

Only C,
H, F, D

DOS/TOS
Assembler

OS/360
Assembler

-

---

~-

DC length modifier

BPS 8K Tope,
BOS 8K Disk
Assemblers

--------Only C,

X

X

X

X

Except l

X2

X

Except S

-- X
f---

H, F, D

Only C

Only C

X

X

X

256

256

256

65,535

65,535

- .-

- -

X

X

X

- .-

- -

-

X

X

--

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

._--X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

6 operands

X

X

5 operands

X

X

~-

DS maximum length modifier
f---

DS constant subfield permitted

-COpy
-CSECT
--

-

DSECT

--

---

ISEQ

- .-

- -

LTORG

- --

--

PRINT

--

- -

TITLE

-

-

X

-

-

- -

-

1 operand

X

----

.-

COM
leTl

1 operand
(lor 25
only)

---- --

- ---

~--

---

----

-

1---

USING

2 operands
(operand 1
relocatable
only)

2-17 operands
(operand 1
relocatable
only}

-

1---

1 operand
only

X

CCW

operand 2
(re locatable
only)

X

X

X

X

ORG

no bl(]nk
operand

no blank
operand

X

X

X

1 operand
only

1 operand
only

1 operand
only

X

X

I operand
only (max 14)

1 operand
only

I operand
only

X

X

X2

Xl

2 decimal
digits

X

X

-

X

X

X

X

X

DROP

--c----

f---

-ENTRY
--

EXTRN

WXTRN

-CNOP
PUNCH

---

REPRO
----Macro Instructions

--

--

2 decimal
digits

2 decimal
digits

_._--- - - .-- --

--

-

- --

--

X

X

X

-

--

--

--

Xl

X

X

X

X

X

~-

OPSYN

--

EQU

---

'Assembler F only
2 DOS Assembler 14KD only

146

-

BPS 8K Tape,
BOS 8K Disk
Assemblers

Macro Faci I ity Features

Operand Subl ists
Attributes of macro-instruction operands inside macro definitions and symbols used in
conditional assembly instructions outside macro definitions.

BOS 16K
Disk/Tape
Assembler

----

Subscripted SET symbols

05/360
Assembler

X

X

X

X

X

X
1

Maximum number of operands

49

100

Conditional assembly instructions outside macro definitions

- -

X

X

global SETA

16

*

*

global SETB

128

*

*

global SHC

16

*

*

local SETA

16

*

*

local SETB

128

*

*

local SETC

0

*

*

200

Maximum number of SET symbols

* The number of SET symbols permitted is variable, dependent upon available main storage.
1
Note: The maximum size of a character expression is 127 characters for the DOS/TOS Assembler D and
255 characters for the OS Assembler F.
1 200 for Assembler F

Appendix I:

Assembler Languages--Features Comparison

147

APPENDIX

The macro definitions in this appendix are
typical applications of the macro language
and conditional assembly. Another macro
definition is included in the sample program as part of Appendix H.

SAMPLE MACRO DEFINITIONS

Notice the use of the inner macro instruction (IHBERMAC) within SAVE for the
purpose of generating MNOTE statements.
Included with SAVE are some examples of the
statements generated from it.

MEMBER NAME SAVE
MACRO
SAVE £.REG,f.COOl:,£.[D
LCLA £.A, &H,(.C
LCLC &r:,&F,r.G,&H
AIF
I '!oREG' EQ to I.El
AIF
I'!.ID' .. E(J "I.NULLID
AIF
1'& 10' EO '*' I.SPECID
&A
SETA IIK'(.ID+21/21*2+4
&NAME
&A.IOol51
B
dRANCH AROUND 10
&A
SETA K'('IU
All ((.~ I
DC
LEr-JGTH f1F IDENTIFI""R
.CONT8
AIF
I&A (IT 321.SPLITUP
• CONT AA AIF
I('A GT 81.8RAKDW~
&E
SETC '(,10' 11>8+1,£.AI
DC
CL&A'&E'
IDENTIFIER
AGO
.CONTA
• BRAKOWN ANOP
&E
SETC '&10' 1&1:1+1,81
DC
CL8'&E'
IDENTIFIER
&B
SETA &8+8
&A
SETA &<\-8
AGO
.CO"lTAA
.SPLITUP ANOP
&E
SETC '&IO'I&IH1,81
&f
SETC '&10'1&8+1,81
&G
SETC '& IO' ( &8+ 1 7,8 I
&H
SETC '&IO'(&B+25,61
DC
Cl32'&E.&F.&G.&H~
IDENTIFIER
&B
SETA ('B+32
&A
SETA &A-32
.corHB
AGO
.NUlllO ANOP
&NAME
OH
OS
AGO
.CONTA
.SPECIO AIF
I'&NAME' EO "I.CSECTN
tE
SETC '&NAME'
&A
SETA 1
.CONTO
AIF
1'&E'll,&AI EO 'U'I.LEAVE
&A
SETA &A+l
AGO
.CONTQ
.LEAVE
ANOP
&8
SETA II&A+21121*2+4
f;NAHE
£.8.10,151
B
BRANCH !\ROUND ID
DC
All I £.AI
DC
CL&A'£.E'
IDENTIFIER
AGO
.CO~TA
.CSECTN AIF
I'&SYSECT' EQ "1.E4
&E
SETC '&SYSECT'
&A
SETA 1
AGO
.CONTO
.E4
IHBERHAC 78,360
CSECT NAI'E ~UlL
.CONT A
IT'®ll1 NE '1'1' I.E3
AIF
AIF
I'£.CODE' EQ 'T'I.CONTC
AIF
I'tCOOE' NE " I.E2
&A
SETA ®lll*4+20
AIF
I&A lE 75 I .CONTO
tA
SETA £.A-64
.CONTO
AIF
CN'® NE 21.CONTE
STM
®lll,®I2I,&A.1131
~AVE fl.EGISTERS
MEXIT
.CONTE
AIF
IN'® NE 1 I • E3
ST
®I 1 I ,&A. 113,01
SAVE REGISTER
MEX IT
.CONTC
AIF
1 ® 11 I GE 14 OR ®C 11 LE 21.CONTF
ST~
14,15,121131
SAVE REGISTERS
&A
SETA ®lll*4+20
AIF
IN'f.REG /\lE 21.COl'HG
STH
®lll,tREGI21,&A.1131
SAVE REGI~TERS
MEXIT
AIF.
.CONTC
IN'® NE 11. E3
ST
&REClll,&A.113,OI
SAVE REGISTER
HEXIT
&NAME

J:

00020000
00040000
00060001)
1)0080000
aOlOOOO!)
00120000
00140000
1)0160000
00180000
0020000-)
00220000
00240000
00260000
0028000<)
00300000
0032000)
00340000
00360000
00380000
00400000
00420000
00440000
00460000
004ClOOOO
00500000
00520000
00540000
00560000
OC580000
00600000
00620000
00640000
00660000
00680000
00700000
00720000
00740000
00760000
Ov780000
00800000
00820000
OUfl40000
008(0001)
0081:10000
00900000
009<'0000
00940000
00160000
0091:10000'
01000000
01020000
01040000
01000000
01080000
01100000
01120000
01140000
01160000
01180000
01200000
01220000
01240000
'01260000
01280000
01300000
01320000
01340000
01360000
01380000
01400000
01420000
01440000

Appendix J:

Sample Macro Definitions

149

I"I'® ~E 21.CONTH
AIF
14, &R E G 1 2 ) , 121 13)
STM
MOIT
(~'® NE 11. E 3
AIF
.CONTH
14. &R E G ( 1 ) • 121 13)
STM
MEXIT
IHBERMAC 18,360
.fl
HEXIT
IHBERHAC 37,360,&CODE
.E2
HEXIT
IHBERMAC 36.360,&RlOG
.1'3
MEND
END OF DATA FOR SOS OR MEMBER
.CONTF

SAVE REGISTERS
SAVE REGISTEP,S
REG PARAM II'ISSING
INVALID CODE SPECIFIED
INVALID RI::GS. SPECIFIED

01460000
01480000
01500000
01520000
01540000
01560000
01580000
01600000
OJ62000J
01640000
01660000
01680000

SAMPLE SAVE MACRO INSTRUCTIONS

FOGHORN
FOGHORN

SAVE
OS
STM

(l~.12)

OH
1~.12.12113)

SAVE REGISTERS

...........
SAVE
OS

(REGl~.REG121.T

OM
12,...

IHB002

INVALID FIRST OPERAND

SPECIFIED-IREG1~,R

...........
SAVMACRO SAVE
SAVMACRO 8

Il~.121.T
1~CO.151

••
BRANCH AROUND 10

All(8)

DC
DC

CL8'SAVMACRO' IDENTifiER

STM

1~.12.121131

SAVE REGISTERS

MEMBER NAME
£NAME

£NAME

NOlt
MACRO
NOTE &DC8
AIF
('&UC8' EQ "I.EKR
IHBINNRA &DCU
l

1 5 , fl4 ( 0, 1 )

BALR

14,15

MEX IT

.ERR

~fHBER

IHBERMAC 6
MEND

NAME POINT
MACRO
POINT &DCB,&LOC
AIF

!'f.DCIP

EQ "I.ERRI

i'&LOC' to "1.f::RR2
IHRINNRA &DC8,&LOC
15,8410, L)
3AL
14,4115,0)

AIF

.ERR2

IH8ERMAC 6
MEXIT
I HBERMAC

MEND

MEMBER NAME

CHECK

~OECij

A!F

('&oECB' EQ "I.EI
t:.oECR
810.11
15,5210,14)
14,15

fli:qNNRA
L
1. ...

L
f\AlR

.tl

1:50

OOOtsOOOO

LUAU

RTN AnORESS 00100000
LINK TO NOTE
ROUTINF
00120000
00140000
1)0160000
00130000
~OT~

00020000
00040000
OOObOOOO
00080000
00100000
LOAD POINT RTN ADDRESS 00120000
LINK ro POINT ROUTJN[
00140000
00160000
00180000
0020001)0
00220000
00240000

CHECK

MACRO

&NAME

00020000
00040000
00060000

MEX IT
IHI:lERMAC 01,018
MEND

00020000
00040000
00060000

ouoeoooo

piCK UP DCB AODRESS
00100000
LUAD CHECK RUUT. ACOR. 0012000')
L1~K TO CHECK ROlJTI~1'
0014000J
00160000
00180000
00200000

INDEX
Indexes to systems reference library manuals are consolidated in the publication OS Master Index to Reference Manuals, Order No. GC28-6644.
For additional information about any sub ject below, refer to other publications listed for the same sub ject -i~ ~h~ -Mast;r Index.

&SYS,restrictions on use
67,81,95
&SYSECT (see current control section name)
&SYSLIST (see macro instruction operand)
&SYSNDX (see macro instruction index)
7090/7094 Support Package Assembler
3,145
Absolute expressions
17,29
Absolute terms
10
ACTR instruction 89
Address constants
47-49
A-type
47
Complex relocatable expressions
47
Literals not allowed
15
Q-type
48
S-type
48
V-type
48
Y-type
47
Address specification
30
Addressing
Dummy sections
25
Explicit
19
External control sections
28
Implied
19
Relative
21
AGO instruction
89
AIF instruction
88
Alignment, boundary
CNOP instruction for
56
Machine instruction
29
Ampersands in
Character expressions
83
Macro instruction operands
71
MNOTE instruction
94
Symbolic parameters
67
Variable symbols
62,140
ANOP instruction
90
Apostrophes
Character expressions
84
Macro instruction operands
71
MNOTE instruction
94
Arithmetic expressions
Arithmetic relations
86
Evaluation procedure
82
Invalid examples
82
Operand sublists
72
Operators allowed
81
Parenthesized terms
evaluation
82
examples
82
SETA instruction
81
SETB instruction
86
Substring notation
84
Terms allowed
81
Valid examples
81
Arithmetic relations
86
Arithmetic variable
98
Assembler instructions
Statement
35,133
Table
131
Assembler language
Basic Programming Support
9,145
Comparison chart
145
Macro language, relation to
61
Statement forma~
8,9
Structure
10,11

Assembler program
Basic functions
4
Output
22
Assembly, terminating an
58
Assembly no operation (see ANOP
instruction)
Attributes
How referred to
77
Inner macro instruction operands
Notations
76
Operand sublists
76
outer macro instruction operands
Summary chart
139
Symbols
76
Types
76
Use
76
(see also specific attributes)

76
76

Basic Programming Support Assembler
3,145
Base registers
Address calculation
4,28,30
DROP instructions
20
Loading
20
19
USING instructions
Begin column
8,53,54
Binary constant
43
13
Binary self-defining term
Binary variable
98
Blanks
Logical expressions
86
71
Macro instruction operands
CCW instruction
50
51
Channel command word, defining
Character codes
107
Character constant
42
Character expressions
Ampersands
84
Apostrophes
84
86
Character relations
Examples
84
Periods
84
SETB instructions
86
SETC instructions
83
Character relations
86
Character self-defining term 13
Character set
15,107
Character variable
98
CNOP instruction
56
coding form
7
8,53,54
Columns (begin, continue, end)
COM instruction
27
72
Commas, macro instruction operands
Comment Entry 9
Comment statements
Example
69
69
Model statements
Not generated
69
Comparison chart
145
Compatibility
Assembler language
3
Macro definitions
104
47
Complex relocatable expressions
Concatenation
83,85
Character expressions
Defined
68
Index

151

Examples
68
Substring notations
85
Conditional assembly elements, summary
charts of
90,138
Conditional assembly instructions
How to write
75
Summary
75
Continue column
8,53,54
Use
75
(see also specific instructions)
Conditional branch (see AIF instruction)
Conditional branch instruction
32
Operand format
33
Constants (see also specific types)
Defining (see DC instructions)
Summary
135
continuation lines
7
Control dictionary
22
Control section location assignment
22
Control sections
Blank common
27
CSECT instruction
23
Defined
22
First control section, properties of
START instruction
23
Unnamed
24
COpy instruction
57
COPY statements in macro definitions
Format
70
Model statements, contrasted
70
Operand field
70
Use
69
Count attribut.e
Defined
79
Notation
79
Operand sublists
79
Use
78
Variable symbols
79
CSECT instruction
Length attribute
23
Symbols
23
Current control section name (&SYSECT)
Affected by CSECT,DSECT,START
99
Example
100
Use
99
CXD instruction
26
Data definition instructions
36
Channel command words
50
Constants
36
Storage
48
DC instruction
36
Constant operand subfield
41
Address constant (see Address
constants)
Binary constant
43
Character constant
42
Decimal constant
46
Fixed-point constant
43
Floating-point constant
44
Hexadecimal constant
42
Type codes for
38
Exponent modifier
41
Duplication factor operand subfield

152

23

Length modifier
39
Bit length specification
39
Modifiers operand subfield
38
Scale modifier
40
Type operand subfield
38
Decimal constants
46
Length, maximum
46
Length modifier
39
Packed
46
Zoned
46
Decimal field, integer attribute of
80
Decimal self-defining terms
12
Defining constants (see DC instruction)
Defining storage (see DC instruction
DS instruction)
,
Defining symbols
12
Dimension, subscripted SET symbols
97
Displacements
29
Double-shift instruction
29
DROP instruction
20,29
DS instruction
48-50
Defining areas
50
Forcing alignment
50
DSECT instruction
24
Dummy section location assignment
25
Duplication factor
38
Forcing alignment
50
DXD instruction
26
Effective address, length
30
EJECT instruction
52
End column
8,53,54
END instruction
58,66
ENTRY instruction
27,28
Entry point symbol, identification of
28
EQU instruction
35
Equal signs, as macro instruction operands
71
Error message (see MNOTE instruction)
Error messages after END statement
58
Explicit addressing
19,30
Length
30
Exponent modifiers
41
Expressions
16
Absolute
17
Evaluation
16
Relocatable
17
Summary chart 138
Extended mnemonic codes
32
Operand format
33
External control section, addressing of 28.1
External dummy sections
26
External symbol, identification
28
EXTRN instruction
27,28

38

First control section
23
Fixed-point constants
44
Format
43
Positioning
44
Scaling
44
Values, minimum and maximum 44
Fixed-point field, integer attribute of
Floating-point constant
44
Alignment
45

78

Format
45
Scale modifiers
45
Floating-point field, integer attribute
of
78
Format control, input
53
GBLA instruction
95
GBLB instruction
95
GBLC instruction
95
General register zero, base register
usage
20
Generated statements, examples of
68
Global SET symbols
63
Defining
95
Examples
96,97
Local SET symbols, compared
94
Use
94
Global variable symbols
Types
94
(see also global SET symbols,
subscripted SET symbols)
Hexadecimal constants
42
Hexadecimal-decimal conversion chart
113-117
Hexadecimal self-defining terms
13
II (see integer attribute)
ICTL instruction
53,66
Identification-sequence field
9
Identifying assembly output
51
Identifying blank common control section
26
Identifying dummy section
24
Implied addressing
30
Length
31
Implied length specification
31
Inner macro instruction
Defined
73
Examples
74
Symbolic parameters
73
Instruction alignment
29
Integer attribute
Decimal fields
78,80
Defined
78,79
Examples
79,80
Fixed-point fields
78,79
Floating-point fields
78,80
How to compute
79
Restrictions on use
78
Symbols
78
ISEQ instruction
54,66
KI (see count attribute)
Keyword
Defined
100
Keyword macro definitions
101
Keyword macro instruction
101
Symbolic parameter and
101
Keyword, inner macro instructions used in
102
Keyword macro definition
Positional macro definitions, compared
101

Use
101
Keyword macro instruction
Example
101
Format
101
Operand sublists
102
Operands
Invalid examples
101
Valid examples
102
Keyword prototype statement
E:xample
101
Format
101
Operands
Invalid examples
101
Valid examples
101
101
Standard values
LI (see length attribute)
LCLA instruction
81
LCLB instruction
81
LCLC instruction
81
Length attribute
Defined
15,78
Examples
78
Restrictions on use
76
Symbols
15,79
Length modifier
39
Bit-length specification
39
Length subfield
29
Lengths, explicit and implied
30
Library, copying coding from
57
Linkage symbols (see also ENTRY
instruction, EXTERNAL .instruction)
Entry point symbol
28
External symbol
28
Linkage editor, and use of
27-28.1
Listing, spacing
52
Listing control instructions
51
Literal pools
14,55
Literals
14
Character
15
DC instruction, used in
15
Definitions
37
Duplicate
56
Format
15
Literal pool, beginning (LTORG)
55
Literal pools, multiple
15
Local SET symbols
Defining
95
Examples
95-97
Global SET symbols, compared
94
Local variable symbols
Types
94
(see also local SET symbols and
subscripted SET symbols)
Location counter
CSECT
22
Definition
14
DSECT
24
How to set
ORG
55
START
23
42,47
Use in address constants
Logical expressions

Index

153

AIF instructions
88
86
Arithmetic relations
Blanks
86
86
Character relations
Evaluation
87
87
Invalid Examples
86
Logical operators
Parenthesized terms
Evaluation
87
Examples
87
86
Relation operators
86
SETB instructions
Terms allowed
86
Valid examples
87
IJTORG instruction
55
Machine-instruction examples and format
RR 29,31
RS 29,32
RX 29,32
S
29,32
SI 29,32
SS
29,32
Summary table
119
Machine-instruction mnemonic codes
31
Alphabetical listing
122
By duration code
129
Machine instructions
29
29
Alignment and checking
Literals, limits on
14
Mnemonic operation codes
31
29
Operand fields and subfields
Symbolic operands
31
MACRO
Format
6
Use
65
Macro library defined
61
Macro definition
Compatibili.ty
104
Defined
61
Error flagging 58
Example
67
Header
65
How to prepare
65
Keyword (see Keyword macro definition)
Mixed-mode (see Mixed-mode
macro definition)
65
Placement in source program
Trailer
65
Use
61
Macro definition exit (see MEXIT
instruction)
Macro definition header statement (see
MACRO)
Macro definition trailer statement (see
MEND)
Macro instruction
Defined
61
Example
67
Format
71
71
How to write
Levels
74
71
Mnemonic operation code
Name field
71
72
Omitted operands
Examples
72
~.

-)

154

Operand field
71
72
Operand sUblists
Operands
Ampe.rsands
72
71
Apostrophes
Blanks
72
Commas
72
71
Equal signs
71
Parentheses
71
Operation field
72
Statement format
Types
61
Macro instruction index (&SYSNDX)
Examples
99
Use
98
Macro instruction operand (&SYSLIST)
Attributes
100
Use
100
(see also symbolic parameters)
Macro instruction prototype statement (see
prototype statement)
Macro instruction statement (see macro
instruction)
Macro language
Comparison chart
147
Extended features
93
61
Relation to assembler language
Summary
91,137-140
MEND
Format
65
MEXIT instruction, contrasted
93
Use
65
MEXIT instruction
Example
93
Format
93
MEND, contrasted
93
Mixed-mode macro definitions
Positional macro definitions,
contrasted
103
Use
103
Mixed-mode macro instruction
103
Mixed-mode prototype statement
103
Mnemonic operation codes
29,31
Extended
32
Machine instruction
31
Macro instruction
65
MNOTE instruction
Ampersands
94
Apostrophes
94
Error message
94
Examples
94
Format
93
Severity code
94
Model statements
Comments field
67
Defined
66
Name field
66
Operand field
67
Operation field
66

N' (see Number attribute)
NamA entry
8

Number attribute
Defined
79
Examples
79
Operand sublist
Alternate statement format
72
Defined
72
Examples
73
Operands
Entries
8
Fields
29
Subfields
29,30
Symbolic
27,29,30
Operating system
5
Operation field
29
OPSYN instruction
35,36,66
ORG instruction
55
Outer macro instruction defined
73
71
Paired apostrophes
71
Paired parentheses
Parentheses
82
Arithmetic expressions
Logical expressions
87
Macro instruction operands
71
Operand fields and subfields
29
Paired
71
Period
84
Character expressions
69
Comments statements
Concatenation
68
Sequence symbols
80
positional macro definition (see macro
definition)
positional macro instruction (see macro
definition and macro instruction)
Previously defined symbols
12
PRINT instruction
52,66
53
Program control instructions
Program listing&
5
22
Program sectioning and linking
Prototype statement
Examples
66
Format
65
Keyword (see keyword prototype
statement)
Mixed-mode (see mixed-mode prototype
statement)
Name field
65
Operand field
65
Operation field
65
Statement format
Alternate
66
Normal
66
Symbolic parameters
65
Pseudo Register (see DXD instruction)
PUNCH instruction
54
Quotation marks (see Apostrophes)
Quoted string
71
Relational operators
86
Relative addressing
21
Relocatability
4,10,11
Attributes
17
Program, general register zero
Relocatable expressions
17,29
In USING instructions
20

20

Relocatable terms
10,11
Pairing of
17
In relocatable expressions
REPRO instruction
55
RR machine instruction
Format
31,119
Length attribute
29
RS machine instruction
Address specification
30
Format
32,119
Length attribute
29
RX machine instruction
Address specification
30
Format
32,119
Length attribute
29

17

S

machine instruction
format 29,32,120
S' (see scaling attribute)
Sample program 141
Scale modifier
Fixed-point constants
43
Floating-point constants
45
Scaling attribute
Decimal fields
78
Defined
78
Examples
78
Fixed-point fields
78
Floating-point fields
78
Restrictions on use
78
Symbols
78
Self-defining terms
12
(see also specific terms)
Sequence checking
54
Sequence symbols
AGO instruction
89
AIF instruction 88
ANOP instruction
90
How to write
80
Invalid examples
80
Macro instruction
80
Valid examples
80
Set symbols
Assigning values
75
Defining
75
75
Symbolic parameters, contrasted
Use
75
(see also local SET synbols, global SET
symbols, and subscripted SET symbols)
SET variable
94
SETA instruction
Examples
81-83
Format
81
Operand field
81,82
Evaluation procedure
Operators allowed
81
Parenthesized terms
82
Terms allowed
81
Valid examples
82
Operand sublist
82
Examples
82
SETA symbol
82
Arithmetic relations
82
Assigning values to
Defining
75,82
Use
82
SETB instruction
Examples
86
Index

155

Format
86
Logical expressions
86
86
Arithmetic relations
Blanks
87
86
Character relations
Evaluation
87
86
Operators allowed
Terms allowed
86
Operand field
84
87
Invalid examples
87
Valid examples
SETB symbol
87
AIF instruction
75
Assigning values
Defining
75
87
SETA instructions, use in
87
SETB instructions, use in
87
SETC instructions, use in
SETC instruc1:ion
83
Character expressions
Ampersands
84
Apostrophes
83,84
Periods
84
Concatenation
84
Character expressions
Substring notation
84
Examples
83,85
Format
83
Operand field
83
Substring notations
84
Arithmetic expressions
84
Character expressions
Invalid examples
85
Valid examples
85
Type attribute
83
Examples
83
SETC symbol
85
Assigning values
Defining
75,85
SETA instruction, use in
86
93,94
Severity code in MNOTE instruction
131 machine instruction
30
Address specification
Format
32,119
Length attribute
29
SPACE instruction
51
SS machine instruction
30
Address specification
Format
32,119
29
Length attribute
Length field
30
Standard value
Attributes
102
101
Keyword prototype statement
8'rART ins truction
Positioning
23
24
Unnamed control sections
Statements
8,9
Boundaries
8
Examples
9
71
Macro instruction
Prototype
65
Storage, defining (see DS instruction)
Sublist (~ee Operand sublist)
Subscripted SET symbols
Defining
97,98
Examples
97
Dimension
98
156

Invalid examples
97
Subscript
95
Use
98
Examples
98
Valid examples
97
Substring notation
Arithmetic expressions
84
Character expression
84
Invalid example
85
SETB instruction
86
SETC instruction
85
Valid examples
85
Symbol definition, EQU instruction for
Symbolic linkages
27
Symbolic operand formats
31
Symbolic parameters
Assigning values
67
Comments field
66
Concatenation
68
Defined
67
Exa~ples, invalid and valid
68
Prototype statement
65
(see also variable symbols)
Symbols
Defining
12
Length attributes
15,29
Length, maximum
12
Previously defined
12
Restrictions
12
Value attributes
29
System macro instructions defined
62
System variable symbols
Assigned values by assembler
98
Defined
98
(see also specific system variable
symbols)

12

T' (see type attribute)
Terms
Expressions composed of
10
In parentheses
16
Pairing of
16
TITLE instruction
51
Type attribute
Defined
77
Literals
77
Macro instruction operands
77
SETB instruction
86
SETC instruction
83
Symbols
77
Unconditional branch (see AGO instruction)
Unnamed control section
24
USING instruction
19
Variable symbols
Assigning values
63
Defined
62
Summary chart
140
Types
62
Use
62
(see also specific variable symbols)
V-type address constant
48
WXTRN instruction 28.1,48
XFR Instruction
3
y-type address constant

47

as

Assembler Language

READER'S
COMMENT
FORM

GC28-6514-9

Your views about this publication may help improve its usefulness; this fonn
will be sent to the author's department for appropriate action. Using this
form to request system assistance or additional publications will delay response,
however. For more direct handling of such request, please contact your
IBM representative or the IBM Branch Office serving your locality.

n

c

-l

»

r

o
Z

Q

o
o

-l
-l

m

o
C
Z

m

Reply requested:
Yes D
No
0

Name: . _______________________
Job Title:
Address: _
Zip

Thank you for your cooperation. No postage stamp necessary if mailed in the U.S.A. (Elsewhere, an IBM office
or representative will be happy to forward your comments.)

GC28-6514-9

Your comments, please ...
This manual is part of a library that serves as a reference source for systems analysts,
programmers, and operators of IBM systems. Your comments on the other side of this
form will be carefully reviewed by the persons responsible for writing and publishing
this material. All comments and suggestions become the property of IBM.
0

C
-I

0

:J:J
"T1

0

r
Fold

Fold

......................................................................................................

0

~

r

0

z

G)

First Class
Permit 40
Armonk
New York

!:
z
m

0

en
:t:-

V>
V>

CD

3
c-

Business Reply Mail

~

No postage stamp necessary if mailed in the U.S.A.

r

Q)

::J

c.c
c:::

Q)

c.c
CD

Postage will be paid by:

."

m

International Business Machines Corporation
Department 813 L
1133 Westchester Avenue
White Plains, New York 10604

Z

p

en
w
en
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat 9.13 Paper Capture Plug-in
Modify Date                     : 2009:09:03 23:34:34-07:00
Create Date                     : 2009:09:03 23:34:34-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2009:09:03 23:34:34-07:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:22625150-9ec0-46a0-b64d-8155664ea1eb
Instance ID                     : uuid:f33b9082-8157-409d-b6aa-5a7e7a7a4cb9
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 173

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools